:N2VERS!TY Of CALEFORNIA 
 LOS ANGELES
 
 JBool?5 on lEoppt an5 (Ibal&aea 
 
 Vol. XXI. OF THE SERIES 
 
 THE 
 
 EGYPTIAN HEAVEN AND HELL 
 
 Vol. II. 
 
 THE SHORT FORM of the BOOK AM-JUAT 
 
 AND 
 
 THE BOOK OF GATES
 
 BOOKS ON EGYPT AND CHALDAEA. 
 
 Vol. I. 
 
 Vol. II. 
 
 Vol. III. 
 
 Vol. IV. 
 
 Vol. V. 
 
 Vol. VI. 
 
 Vol. VII. 
 
 Vol. VIII. 
 
 Vol. IX. 
 
 Vol. X. 
 
 Vol. XI. 
 
 Vol. XII. 
 
 Vol. XIII. 
 
 Vol. XIV. 
 
 Vol. XV. 
 
 Vol. XVI. 
 
 Vol. XVII. 
 
 Veil. XVIII. 
 
 Vol. XIX. 
 
 Vol. XX. 
 
 Vol. XXI.- 
 
 Vol. XXII.- 
 
 Vol. XXIII. 
 
 EGYPTIAN RELIGION. 
 --EGYPTIAN MAGIC. 
 -EGYPTIAN LANGUAGE. 
 -BABYLONIAN RELIGION. 
 -ASSYRIAN LANGUAGE. 
 -BOOK OF THE DEAD, vol. i. 
 
 - „ „ ,, vol. ii. 
 
 - ,, ,, ,, vol. iii. 
 HISTORY OF EGYPT, vol. i- 
 
 vol. ii. 
 vol. iii. 
 vol. iv. 
 ,, vol. V. 
 
 „ vol. vi. 
 ,, vol. vii. 
 „ vol. viii. 
 -THE DECREES OF MEMPHIS AND 
 CANOPUS-THE ROSETTA STONE, vol. i. 
 -THE DECREES OF MEMPHIS AND 
 CANOPUS-THE ROSETTA STONE, vol. ii. 
 -THE DECREES OF MEMPHIS AND 
 CANOPUS-THE STELE OF CANOPUS, 
 vol. iii. 
 -EGYPTIAN HEAVEN AND HELL, vol. i. 
 ,, ,. ,, vol. ii. 
 
 ,, >> vol. iii. 
 
 -BABYLONIAN MAGIC. Ihi prepara/ioi,:} 
 
 FttU l'roi<pecttvsi on application. 
 
 KEG AN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & CO. Ltd. 
 Dryden House, Gerrard Street, London, \V.
 
 1Boo\\B on iBG^pt atib (Tbalbaea 
 
 THE 
 
 EGYPTIAN HEAVEN AND HELL 
 
 E. A. WALLTS BUDGE, M.A., Litt.D., D.Litt., D.Lit. 
 
 KEEPEK OF THE EGYPTIAN AND ASSYRIAN ANTIQUITIES 
 IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM 
 
 VOL. II. 
 THE SHORT FORM of the BOOK AM-TUAT 
 
 AND 
 
 THE BOOK OF GATES 
 
 LONDON 
 
 KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & CO. Ltd. 
 
 Dryden House, 43, Gerrard Street, W. 
 
 1905 
 
 [/J// rights resetved'\
 
 I.OSUDy 
 PUIMKl) TIV GII.IIKIIT AM) JilMNIiTON t.nMTKn 
 
 NT. John's hoi'sk, ti.KKKKNWFt.t., F.r.
 
 I SSI 
 
 NOTE 
 
 This volume is the second of a series of three volumes which 
 treat of the Egyptian Heaven and Hell. It contains the 
 complete hieroglyphic text of the Sumniar}', or short form of 
 the Book Am-Tuat, and the complete hierogl3'phic text of the 
 Book of Gates, with translations and reproductions of all the 
 illustrations. A series of Chapters dealing with the origin and 
 contents of Books of the Other World, with prefatory remarks, 
 and a full index to the whole work, will be found in the third 
 volume. 
 
 48r2C'57
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 The (Goddess Nut. From the Sarcuphagus of 
 
 Seti I. ..... • Froiillapiccu 
 
 The Short Form of the Jjook Am-Tuat : — 
 
 First Hour 
 
 Second Hour . 
 
 Third Hour 
 
 Fourth Hour . 
 
 Fifth Hour 
 
 Sixth Hour 
 
 Seventh Hour . 
 
 Eighth Hour . 
 
 Ninth Hour 
 
 Tenth Hour 
 
 Eleventh Hour 
 
 Twelfth Hour 
 The Alabaster Sarc 
 Ari'ENDix : Belzoni's Account of his Discovery 
 
 OF the Tomb of Seti I 
 
 The Book of Gates : — 
 
 The Western Vestibule, or Ante-chamber of 
 
 THE TUAT, SeT-AmENTET, GUARDED BY SeT 
 
 AND Tat. With 2 Illustrations 
 III. The First Gate, guarded by Saa-Set. With 10 
 
 Illustrations 
 
 The Second Gate, Sevtet-uauau, guarded bv 
 
 Aqebi. With 7 lUustiatiuns .... 
 The Third Gate, Nebt-s-tchefau, guarded by 
 
 TcHETBi. With 10 lllu.stiation.s 
 
 1. 
 
 11. 
 
 IV. 
 
 
 
 . 1 
 
 
 
 . 4 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 . 13 
 
 
 
 . 16 
 
 
 
 . 20 
 
 
 
 . 25 
 
 
 
 . 30 
 
 
 
 . 32 
 
 
 
 . 34 
 
 
 
 . 36 
 
 
 
 . 38 
 
 iagus of 
 
 Seti I. 
 
 . 43 
 
 80 
 
 86 
 
 100 
 
 ilu
 
 Vlll CONTENTS 
 
 CHAP. PAGE 
 
 VI. The Fourth Gate, Arit, guarded by Teka-hra. 
 
 With 11 Illustrations 139 
 
 VII. The Judgment Hall of Osiris. With 1 llhistia- 
 
 tion iri8 
 
 VIII. The Fifth Gate, Nebt-auA, guarded by Set-km- 
 
 MAAT-F. With 4 Illustrations . . . . IfiS 
 rX. The Sixth Gate, Pestit, guarded by Akha-en- 
 
 maat. With 27 Illustrations .... 190 
 X. The Seventh Gate, Bekhkhi, guarded by Set- 
 
 hra. With 9 Illustrations . . . .219 
 XI. The Eighth Gate, Aat-shefsheft, guarded by 
 
 Ab-ta. With 12 Illustrations . . . .237 
 XII. The Ninth Gate, Tcheserit, guarded by Sethu. 
 
 With 10 Illustrations 259 
 
 XIII. The Tenth Gate, Shetat-besu, guarded by Am- 
 
 NETU-F. With 12 Illustrations . . . 279 
 
 XIV. The Eleventh Gate, Tesert-baiu, guarded by 
 
 Sebi and Eeri, or the Eastern Vestibule 
 
 OF the Tuat. With 2 Illustrations . . 301 
 
 VAlllATX 
 
 V. 10, I. 3, for "Thon-tent-baiu" read "Tt-nt-haiu " ; p. 20, 
 1. 10, foi- "Ni'l)t-nui-tuatiu " read " Metchet-niu-ni'bt-Tuatiu" ; 
 
 ).. IS, 1. -J, for Y ^T^ I 'wid f ^T^ I ; p. 2:J, 1. 3, for ? read 
 ; p. :51, I. 1, for '^^;^ read -^^^ dTH ; p. r,7, 1. 3, for "tlie 
 
 ? 
 
 magical powers" read "her magical powers to those"; p. 113, 
 
 ^— f-H A D 
 
 1.26, for read ; p. 1 lo, 1. 1 1 , for h wnd 
 
 p. ll;», 1. 3, for "Tehetl.i" read " Nel.t-tehefau " ; p. 147, 1. 7. 
 for /I\ read l^.
 
 THE SHORT FORM 
 
 OF THE 
 
 BOOK OF AM-TUAT 
 
 THE SUMMAEY OF THE BOOK: OP WHAT IS 
 IN THE UNDERWOELD. 
 
 The Beginning of the Horn of Amentet, [which is] 
 THE Uttermost Point of the Deepest Darkness. 
 
 THE FIEST HOUE. 
 
 This god entereth into the earth through the Hall of 
 the horizon of Amentet. There are one hundred and 
 twenty atru to journey over in this Hall before a 
 man arriveth at the gods of the Tuat. 
 
 The name of the first Field of the Tuat is Net-ra. 
 He (i.e., Ea) allotteth fields to the gods who are in 
 [his] following, and he beginneth to send forth words 
 to and to work out the plans of the divine beings of 
 the Tuat in respect of this Field. 
 
 AVliosoever shall have these made (i.e., copied) 
 VOL. II. B
 
 2 THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 according to the similitude which is in Ament of the 
 Tuat, [and] whosoever shall have knowledge of these 
 similitudes, [which are] the copies of this great god 
 himself, they shall act as magical protectors for him 
 upon earth regularly and unfailingly, and they shall 
 act as magical protectors for him in the Great Tuat. 
 
 Ushemet-hatu-khefti-Ra is the name of the [first] 
 hour of the night which guideth this great god through 
 this Hall. 
 
 THE FIEST HOUR. 
 
 I. — Feom the Tomb of Seti I. (lines 1 — 22). 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 1 
 
 D 
 
 n n 
 
 j\ 
 
 :1 
 
 1 A 
 
 AA/VV\A ' ' W 
 
 A^vw\A A^^A/^^ 
 
 \ 1^ r—\ AA/VSAA 
 ATWvAA AAA/W\ 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 rr^ A AAAAAA «=iJ ^ .^ >^i^ r\ \ I A^^V\^A I 
 
 
 i\ 
 
 J\ 
 
 ! ^ 
 
 IiH 
 
 I ^ 
 
 cr: 
 
 \f A/wvv^ 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 • In this word, ^v is usually \\Titteu for >^ ti
 
 THE FIRST HOUR 
 
 D 
 
 AA/\AA^ 
 
 
 j I AAAAAA n n 
 
 -^ III 
 
 /^ AWW\ A^WW\ /"C (—1 
 
 II 1 ^VWVN D ^ U ^ 
 
 s 
 
 x""^^^ jil^^l 
 
 THE FIRST HOUE. 
 II. — From the Leyden Papyrus, T. 71. 
 
 X _zr //73H Aww\ 
 
 ^r£=: r-^^~i <=>^ □ 
 
 r^MTf-if^^^^I 
 
 k^i- 
 
 -2» zi 7i q I D 
 
 
 1 
 
 ^^ A/VWAA ^y-v^ 
 
 
 a 
 
 enn" Ji ii ^ ji 
 
 Ji 
 
 ^ 
 
 I ^ 
 
 AAA/VVA ■_ 

 
 THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 I I I A^/^^^A 
 
 1 
 
 I J\ 
 
 '^^m 
 
 m 
 
 i< 
 
 I 
 I ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 fT=f 
 
 * 
 
 ° ^?^tk'i^ ° _J>! 
 
 cr^ 
 
 Jt" 
 
 ^ II 
 
 lO 
 
 A/VVW\ 
 
 I I I 
 
 /vwvv\ A/vwv\ 
 
 A.^^ OLD 
 
 ] 
 
 s 
 
 ^^ 
 
 J\ I A/WW. ^^^ Ll)%J 
 
 THE SECOND HOUR. 
 
 Tliis great god afterwards tuketli up his position in 
 Ur-nrst, wliicli is tlirec liundved and nine atru in 
 leuoth, and one hundred and twenty atru in width. 
 
 The name of the gods who are in this Field is Baiu- 
 TuATi. Whosoever knoweth their names shall have his 
 existence with them, aud unto liiiii shall this great god 
 allot fields in the place wherein they are in the Field 
 OF Urnes. He shall stand up with the Gods who 
 Stand Up (Ahau), he shall travel on in the following
 
 THE SECOND HOUR 5 
 
 of this great god, he shall enter into the earth, he shall 
 force a way through the Tuat, he shall cleave a passage 
 through the tresses of the gods witli flowiug hair 
 (Henksu), he shall travel on by the Eater of the Ass 
 (Am-aa) after the emptying of the lands, he shall eat 
 bread-cakes in tlio lioat of the Earth, and there shall 
 be given unto him the fore-part of Tatuba. 
 
 Whosoever shall have made in writing (or, in 
 drawing) similitudes of the Baiu-Tuati (i.e., the Souls 
 of the Tuat) in the forms in which they are in Ament 
 of the Tuat — now the beginning of such representa- 
 tions should be from Amentet, — and whosoever shall 
 make offerings unto them upon earth in their names, 
 [these things I say] shall act as magical protectors to 
 that person upon earth, regularly and unfailingly. 
 
 And whosoever sliall know the words which the 
 gods of the Tuat speak to this god, and the words 
 which are said by him to them when he is approaching 
 the gods of the Tuat, [these words I say] shall act as 
 magical protectors to him that knoweth them upon 
 earth, regularly and unfailingly. 
 
 Shesat-maket-neb-s is the name of the hour of the 
 night which guideth this great god through this Field. 
 
 THE SECOND HOUR 
 I. — Fkom the Tomb of Seti I. (lines 23 — 61). 
 
 ^ D _Hli^ J^ ^aaJ^aa I wvwv\ t=i:^ _m:^ <=> dZ] 1 <=> Ji U
 
 THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 <2nn 
 
 nnnn Ji ^ Jr /wvaaa i^^^ \> /wwva 1 <==> Ji U 
 
 /vAAAA -iJ U 
 
 ^ \> 
 
 AAA/^^ ,vvvvvv _—_»-- 
 
 n I I I I I I A^yv^\A 
 
 1 
 
 I I I 
 
 n 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 I I I /\ AAAAAA 
 
 
 J] 
 
 /] Jl 
 
 J\ 
 
 V 
 
 1 
 
 D D 
 
 1 
 
 I D 
 
 D 
 
 
 
 s ^ 
 
 ;i 
 
 L[i::z:i 
 
 
 AAAAAA III IS 

 
 THE SECOND HOUR 
 
 AAAAAA I ri 
 
 AAAAAA ' — I 
 
 £5^ 
 
 ^-^1 
 
 ^ 
 
 I s 1 
 
 AWVWV D ^ O <=^ <=> A Jj ' 
 
 ^"=11 D 
 
 I I — n — I T-T 
 
 ^ • 
 
 THE SECOND HOUE. 
 II. — Fkom the Leyden Papyrus, T. 71. 
 
 i D _Cr^ Ji /WvWN I AAAA/V\ — D _CrNS' 
 
 1, 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 !^ 
 
 I I I 
 
 s I 
 
 ^«V\AAA AAAAAA 
 
 
 I I I 
 
 A^/\AAA 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 I I I 
 
 
 Jl 
 
 
 A J\ 
 
 Ic:^^ 
 
 ^fe^Mir^^iv^k,
 
 THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 r=iD 
 
 ^kvP4ZJ1^=11^ 
 
 A A 
 
 -^mw 
 
 H ^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 <:^ c^ 
 
 S 
 
 jyq^r^Hiiiii^iikP^ 
 
 O ^'^'v^A^ ¥\ I AAA/^ ; 
 
 U I ^ [ZTZ] ■^ 
 
 
 
 I .- AAAAAA I I I I I S 
 
 ^\ AAAAAA AAAAAA 
 
 I I I I M 
 
 m 
 
 ^-^5 I 
 
 1 1 s I '^ I 
 
 ^ 
 
 iii!^fliiii:^jiTr^i^i 
 
 C |^^ .*\ AAAAAA 
 
 ^^ -ZL I I I I AAAAAA 
 
 ;1 
 
 I D<:=> Ji ® ^ 
 
 ^i^V 
 
 I I I 
 
 AA/VAAA 
 
 
 ^.>k 
 
 /wwv\ ^ O ^ ^^ 
 
 7\ 
 
 1 
 
 AA/VV\A Ll~J 
 
 ^^ih- 
 
 THE THIIU) IIOUE. 
 
 This great god afterwards taketli up his position in 
 the Fields of the PEiiU-gods (i.e., the Fighters), and 
 
 n
 
 THE THIRD HOUR 9 
 
 this great god paddletli his way over the Stream of 
 Osiris (Net-Asar) in sailing up this Field, which is 
 three hundred and nine atru long, and one hundred 
 and twenty atru wide. Tiiis great god uttercth words 
 to those who are in the following of Osiris to this City, 
 and he allotteth unto them estates which are situated 
 in this Field. 
 
 Baiu-shetaiu (i.e., Hidden Souls) is the name of the 
 gods who are in tliis Field, and whosoever knoweth 
 their names upon earth shall be able to approach to 
 the place where Osiris is, and there shall be given unto 
 him water for his Field. 
 
 Net-nei;-ua-kiieper-auatu is the name of this Field. 
 Whosoever shall know these hidden similitudes of the 
 Hidden Souls in the correct forms wherein they are 
 depicted in Ament of the Tuat — now the beginning of 
 such representations should lie from Amentet — [these 
 figures I say] shall act as magical protectors to that 
 man upon earth, [and] in Neter-khert, regularly and 
 unfailingly. 
 
 Whosoever knoweth these, when he is making his 
 journey past them shall escape from their roarings, 
 and he shall not fall down into their furnaces (or, 
 pits). 
 
 Whosoever knoweth this, when he is keeping ward 
 over [his] seat (or, place), his bread-cake shall be with 
 Ea ; and whosoever knoweth this, being soul [and] 
 spirit, shall have the mastery over his legs, and shall 
 never enter into the place of destruction, but he shall
 
 10 THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 come foitli with liis attributes (or, forms), and shall 
 snufl" tlie air for his hour. 
 
 TiiENTENT-BAiu is the iiamc of tlie hour of the night 
 which uuidcth this <neat Kod through this Field. 
 
 THE THIKD HOUR 
 I. — From the Tomp. of Seti I. (lines 62 — 105). 
 
 nnnn (71) AWAA t^^^A^^yvs Ji n i Ji i=ii=f=3 l^/^wvc^^fr: 
 
 o D 
 
 AA^AAA 
 
 ^^ M. '-^ A^^/v^A - -/I Hi *~^ — ^ r-. _Zi U I rv\A^/\A crrtrr) I aaaaaa 
 
 ■ intiiiii 
 
 /S.VSAAA J 

 
 THE THIRD HOUR II 
 
 M AAAAAA AA/W/^ 
 
 I I I Ji 
 
 
 nirf^q^2P-kkiifi^VS^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 k^iii;^: 
 
 Z] Ji 
 
 mi 11 ^^m /= 
 
 
 ji 
 
 * W K-> />AAAA^ /WSAAA AA/VSAA ^II^ I 
 
 [kii] 
 
 \> AA/NAAA '^ 
 
 THE THIRD HOUR. 
 II. — From the Leyden Papyrus, T. 71. 
 
 
 3SI 
 
 :=^ _^ 1^1 ^ A ^ JT 111 JL I .wwvs I 
 
 I D 
 
 ^IkTEX^U^^Iiik 
 
 (i^: 
 
 s I 
 
 ^Hi^ni^zk
 
 12 
 
 THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 iTiiifk^ivX^?;ri 
 
 J¥;^M-l^iui^MI 
 
 s 
 
 I ,-^ I 
 
 1Jik^iM^q^2 
 
 ^ 
 
 I^S^J 
 
 m 
 
 L^lk 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^^li = M^q^2W^k 
 
 C30 
 
 I l-TT-l l 
 
 1 ^^"^ ! 
 
 i ^ 
 
 
 1 
 
 AAAAAA ; 
 
 I '^i 
 
 ^^iSf^^^^^-m 
 
 r^?-kasL:^i^^2 
 
 P 
 
 
 I I I ra 
 
 |f^^A;™(|^2 
 
 P-ki>jlc^° 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 (^ 
 
 2hk%^^.r.iPM^Ik2ii
 
 THE FOURTH HOUR I3 
 
 .jL.^fe-:2B^.^_^xll>i^m^^^S 
 
 l^sdkX^f^kTI 
 
 I*. 
 
 1 
 
 I u 
 
 AAAA/V\ /W,/W\ 
 
 ^^>^ 
 
 THE FOURTH HOUE. 
 
 The majesty of this great god, having been towed 
 along, afterwards taketh up his position in the secret 
 Circle of Amentet, and he perfurmeth the affairs of the 
 gods of tlie Tiuit who are therein by means of his voice, 
 but he seeth them not. 
 
 Ankh-kiieperu is the name of the gate of this 
 Circle. 
 
 Ament-setiiau is the name of this Circle. 
 
 Whosoever knoweth this representation of tlie hidden 
 roads of Re-statet, and the holy paths of the Ammeiiet, 
 and tlie secret doors which are in the Land of Seker, 
 the god who is upon his sand, shall be in the condition 
 of him that eateth the bread-cakes which are [made] 
 for the mouth of the Living gods in the Temple of 
 Teni. 
 
 "Whosoever knoweth this shall be in tlie condition of 
 him lluit is moat on the ways, and he shall journey
 
 14 THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 over the roads of Ee-setiiau, and he shall see the 
 representations of the Aiimehet. 
 
 UiiT-EM-SEKiiEMU-SET is the name of tlie hour of tlie 
 niiiht wliicli uuidetli this j^reat "rod. 
 
 THE FOURTH HOUR 
 
 I.—From the Tomb of Seti T. (lines lOG— 138). 
 
 I q I G ©s A ^ 
 
 D J^ jT-Ms; ^ lll/wvLi/vwwv I 
 
 
 /I O ^ 
 

 
 THE FOURTH HOUR 15 
 
 A^^AAA — 
 
 THE FOURTH HOUR. 
 II. — FiiOM THE Leyden Rapyrus, T. 71. 
 
 D ^Bf^'Ti 
 
 tl .A III AftAAftA A A^WVNA I /V^^W\ 
 
 Z:> O ■ ^ -< ^ V -<2>- <d> /^^,yv^ JXV^ I I i-J I 
 
 /vv^A^^ 1 ' ' • ^ I V*V JI Jl U A/V^AA^ 1 rfll 
 
 I I 1 rj\Nsr\r\ '^ — ^ O 
 
 !l = s^>Sf|^2 
 
 "'^^ 
 
 D 
 
 
 l=M.^PJ^\"q"fliqik^ 

 
 l6 THE HOOK OF AM-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 f\\^\^!^Kl%.^0\ff,^ 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 ^ 
 
 THE FIFTH HOUR. 
 
 This great god is towed along oxcv the ways of Maat 
 of tlie Tuat tlirougli Ihc \\\>\h'v ludl' of Ihis secret Circle 
 of the god Sekek, wlio is upon his sand, and he neitlier 
 looketh upon nor gazcth at the secret figure of the 
 earth which containcth the flesh of this god. The 
 gods wh(t arc in [the liaiii df] this god licar the 
 words of Iifi, who cricth unto llicm IVoni wliere tins 
 god is. 
 
 AilA-NETERU is the name of the door [of this 
 City]'. 
 
 Ament is the name of tlie Circle of this god, [and in 
 it arc] the secret path of Anientet, and the doors of the 
 hidden palace, and the lioly jdace of tlie Land or 
 Sekeu [willi his] Ih'sh, and [his] nieiidieis, [and his] 
 body, in tlie divine form which they had at first. 
 
 lUlu-A.MU-TUAT is the name of the gods who are hi 
 [this] Circle. Their furiiis {(iru) wlio are in their liour,
 
 THE FIFTH HOUR I7 
 
 and tlii'ir Rccret sliapes {kheperu) neither know, nor 
 look upon, nor sec this image (or, similitude) of Sekeu 
 (or, the hawk) himself. 
 
 WHiosoever shall make these representations according 
 to the image which is in writing in the hidden places 
 of the Tuat, at the south of the Hidden Palace, and 
 wliosoever shall know them shall he at peace, and his 
 soul sliall unite itself to tlie offerings of Seker, and the 
 goddess KiiE.MiT shall not hack his l)ody in pieces, and 
 he shall go on his wa}' tcnvards her in peace. Whoso- 
 ever shall make ollerings to these gods upon earth — 
 [these offerings, I say, shall act as magical protectors 
 to that man upon earth, and in Netek-khekt, regularly 
 and unfailingly]. 
 
 Sem-iiek-ab-uaa-s is the name of the hour of the 
 night which guideth this great god through this 
 Field. 
 
 THE FIFTH HOUR 
 
 I.— From the Tomb of Seti I. (lines 139— 173). 
 
 I /ww.^ J^ U I ( _ffi^ %=5 I 
 
 (^ ^ /I Ci 
 
 — arrfo^ic Jg^ir^i i <=> ^=^ <=> crz] ^ 
 
 VOL. H.
 
 l8 THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 
 /I ^ q I D h r"^ ^^^ r^ tk ^ I 
 
 CTZD I /.wvv, 1 ^ 0:^^ I _M^ ^!=^^ I o 
 
 I 
 
 I ^ 
 
 :5= /^^^^l ^^ J^^:^ =9= CUD ^^ s\ ^-1^ 
 
 /wv\^^ 
 
 I O D 1 JlJr ^ ^^/vlvJU I III I I n /wwv^ O '^ O 
 
 I ^ J 
 
 < > 
 
 < > 
 
 C5 
 
 1 / 
 
 1 1 
 

 
 THE FIFTH HOUR IQ 
 
 THE FIFTH HOUR. 
 
 II. — From the Leyden Papyrus, T. 71. 
 
 \til::z\ii{]\ 
 
 £=:£ 
 
 
 Q 030'^.=^ /U-fl -TL -^5- 
 
 
 D ^-^^-'''^^ 
 
 "|M — Dq I <=^ zi ^=11 on 
 
 ] u _/ J I 1 1 1 A/v^AA^ < ^ O I A^A^^^ 1 
 
 c^n 
 
 HAftAAAA AAA/\AA 
 
 L ® 1 fl A _/-i I 1 1 1 A/v^AA^ < > O I A^A^^^ ^ aaaaaa P''^'"^ 
 
 ?nr^ r~\^~i S=3 i ^ '^^ ;^ Q 
 
 
 ^^^r;lrs?^kS^Mf! 
 
 
 
 /vvwv^ — . , , , 
 
 /W>/v^^ '-^ V^ I I I 
 
 l,'TiSl^J=->^^5^^
 
 20 
 
 THE BOOK OF AM-TIAT — SUMMARY 
 
 "=^ 
 
 
 '^^ 
 
 D ^ 
 
 kfilikfl=liTS^T4ri^ 
 
 1"c^fl^^P°I^I^%^S'i 
 
 -^^ D Ji^ ^=0 I 
 
 ^*^^ 
 
 AA/N/W\ /'A^v^AA 
 
 Ji — M— 
 
 
 I S AA/W^ 
 
 ^ O A^JVNAA 
 
 THE SIXTH HOUR. 
 
 The majesty of this great god taketh u\> his position 
 ill tlie stream of Nebt-mu-tuatiu (i.e., the Lord of the 
 waters of the gods of the Tuat), and lie sendcth forth 
 words to the gods who are tlierein, and he commandeth 
 tliat they have the mastery over tlieir divine ollcrings 
 in this City. He makcth his way tlirongh tliis Field, 
 being provided wiili liis IJoat, and lie settetli apart l>y 
 liis words the estates wliicli are [to ]»ro<hire] their 
 oll'orings in this City, and he giveth to them water for 
 their lakes, and hi* tiavclU'lh through the Tiiat every 
 day. 
 
 Seit-METU is the name of tlie door of this City.
 
 THE SIXTH HOUR 21 
 
 Tlie secret roads of Amentet, and the manner wherein 
 I his great god is being rowed along over the water 
 therein in his boat to perform the plans (or, affairs) of 
 the gods of the Tuat, the gathering together [of them] 
 by their names, the manifestations of their shapes (or, 
 forms), and [their] secret hours, such are the things 
 of which the secret representation of the Tuat is not 
 known to men and women. 
 
 AVhosoever shall make [a copy of] this image in 
 writing, according to the representation of the same 
 which is in the hidden things of the Tuat, at the south 
 of the Hidden Palace, and whosoever shall know them 
 shall be in the condition of one who awardeth offerings 
 'in abundance in the Tuat, and he shall be united to 
 the oflerings of the gods who are in the following of 
 Osiris, and liis parents (or, kinsfolk) shall make the 
 offerings which are obligatory on the earth. 
 
 The majesty of this great god sendeth forth words, 
 and he giveth divine offerings to [the gods of] the Tuat, 
 and he standctli up by them; and they see him, and 
 they have dominion over their Fields and over the 
 gifts made to them, and they ellect their transforma- 
 tions by reason of the words which this great god hath 
 spoken unto them. 
 
 ^Ietchet-nkht-Tuatiu is the name of this Field, 
 which is the road of the Boat of Ra. 
 
 Mesperit-au-maat is the name of the hour of the 
 iii-bt Nvbicli guideth this great god through this 
 country.
 
 22 THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 THE SIXTH HOUR. 
 I. — From tiik Tomij of Seti I. (lines 174 — 210). 
 
 D 
 
 a, l_l /vv^Wv A /vw^\ I ^AA^^^ 
 
 I q 1 D 
 
 AWV\A 
 
 /WWV\ 
 
 
 ^ I 
 
 7i 
 
 ^^^^ 
 
 I I M I I 
 
 ljr.^^iiimxL!JiiiS^_r 
 
 '''■"^ ^::J;^ '^■^^'^ ^^wwN ^^'^"^ Y\ -^-^ ^ W ^<z::7 
 
 I I I M I '=^ ^^.^^ 111 D Ji ill [=:31 _B^ <^I> '^'^'^^ 
 
 ^ ^ I' ^/^/1 b >g*c:. I /wvwv ^^^ /www 1 J^ I -B^ 
 
 1 
 
 UnJ. 
 
 K\l\*\^i\Km\ 
 
 n' 
 
 8*^1 I I 
 
 - rvn n I © n i — n^ ^=> fi ^^^ v.x j 
 
 A/WWA
 
 THE SIXTH HOUR 
 
 23 
 
 "^ 1 " 
 
 _Q re 
 
 ^ D I I I 
 
 1 
 
 / I S i c=i=i='l 4 Jl I /WWSA I A^/WV I 0^=^ I W 
 
 I I I 
 
 I I I 
 
 V ^ 
 
 I I I<=>| I I_BJ^ iVJi Ui I I I .wwvA- — a I I ^ ^"-^ 
 ^'"^ . ^ ^ V ^ ! ^'"'^ ililii "=" If ^ ^H^ 
 
 /WWAA '^ I -CESS _il J— 1 I A/W^VS ' ) /wvw\ U \ _£1C>^ <!> 
 
 I /W\f^/\f\ mm - 
 
 >^^^*- 
 
 THE SIXTH HOUR. 
 
 II. — From the Leyden Tapykus, T. 71. 
 
 U '1 
 
 D 
 
 ^^ U Ar^^A/V^ A /^^VV^-'v^ I A'WNAA 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 ^ir^^l^SlTliS^J
 
 24 
 
 THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 
 ^ I 
 
 I I I I I I ^ /WVWV III D 
 
 ^-f 
 
 k^ = PJ*^ 
 
 I n AAAAAA M 
 
 I /W^rW\ ' '•^ ■ A/VAAAA 1 
 
 ^^ r-gji I 
 
 I I I cri^ I ^ 
 
 ' I /www 
 
 
 ! ^ 
 
 ^T^Ik^mkEX^II 
 
 II 1^ k /^U 
 
 /wwv\ _ 1 '=^- ; — I "^ ' . 
 
 I I I O ^ O I ^^-^ I ^ 
 
 I I 1 1 II 
 
 
 i^:^ \—. 
 
 isti^^^^^ 
 
 ^^^^ 
 
 ^ 2 
 
 D 
 
 AAA/W\ 
 
 kKliE^^S^k^ 
 
 /vww\ I '^ 
 
 ^ nr 
 
 crz3 
 
 
 7i -ca^
 
 THE SEVENTH HOUR 
 
 25 
 
 
 i3?s!krn 
 
 > 
 
 l^P?®kflrT^k 
 
 /WVW^ 
 
 I I I I I ^ Jl U III! 
 
 4 Jr c I III n-^^ !^ cTD ^ I 7ZZ. M^ ^^ ( ^ 
 
 ^-^ ^/wwNA ^nj$ <:: 
 
 D -Zi ^ /WWSA O 
 
 ^.O 
 
 '^Ir' 
 
 
 
 _B^ .4i±i 
 
 THE SEVENTH HOUE. 
 
 The majesty of this great god taketh \\\\ liis position 
 in the secret place of Osiris, and tlie majesty of this 
 great god sendeth forth words into this to the gods 
 who dwell therein. This god maketh to himself other 
 forms for this hidden i)lace in order to drive out of his 
 path the serpent iiend Ai'EP by means of the words of 
 power of Isis, and the words of power of Semsu(?). 
 
 IluTi-AsAU is the name of the gate of this City 
 through which this god passeth. 
 
 Tephet-sheta is the name of this City.
 
 26 THE BOOK OF Am-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 This great god maketh his way over the road of 
 Anient in the holy boat, and he passeth in it over this 
 road which is without water, without being towed 
 along. He maketh his way by means of the words of 
 power of Isis, and by means of the words of power of 
 Semsu (?), and the utterances of this great god himself 
 [act as] magical protectors, and perform the slaughters 
 of Apep in the Tuat, in this Circle, in his windings in 
 the sky. 
 
 Whosoever shall make [a copy of] these [pictures] 
 according to the similitudes whicli are in writing at 
 the northern side uf tlie Hidden Palace in the Tuat, 
 they shall act as magical protectors for him that 
 maketh them in heaven and in earth. And whosoever 
 knoweth them sliall be a soul of souls with Ra. And 
 whosoever shall make (i.e., recite) tlie words of power 
 of Isis and tlie words of power of Semsu, shall make 
 to be driven back the Apep of lia in Amentet. Wlioso- 
 ever shall do [this] in the Hidden Palace of tlie Tuat, 
 and whosoever shall do [this] upon eartli, [the result 
 is] the same. Whosoever knoweth this shall be in the 
 Boat of Efi, l)oth in heaven and upon earth ; but he 
 that halh iio l<ni»wledge of this representation shall not 
 know how to drive back NEilA-lliiA (i.e., Stinking-Face). 
 
 Now the ridge of earth of Neija-hiia in the Tuat is 
 four hundred and fifty cubits in length, and he filleth 
 it with the undulations of his body. The regions which 
 belong to him are made (i.e., kept) for him, and the 
 great god dulh unt make iiis way ••vcr liim when he
 
 THE SEVENTH HOUR 27 
 
 maketli him to turn aside out of the way for him, from 
 the secret place of Osiris, when this god maketh his way 
 through this city in the form of the serpent Meiien. 
 
 Whosoever shall know this upon earth, the serpent 
 Neiia-iira shall not drink his water, and the soul of 
 him tliat knoweth it shall nut l)e evilly entreated by the 
 gods who arc in this Circle; and whosoever knoweth it 
 the crocodile Ab-shau shall not devour his soul. 
 
 KiiESEF-iiAi-iiESEQ-NEiiA-HitA is the name of the 
 hour uf the night which guideth this great god through 
 this Circle. 
 
 THE SEVENTH HOUR 
 
 I. — Fito.M THE ToMP. OF Seti I. (lines 210 — 21:')). 
 
 D . JL I .www □ o X CTZ] H A ^ I _& ll 
 
 ii"^^'''0 ' 1' °:^^=^? " "^ 
 
 1 ~jn y I — — " [—1 <wv\AA 
 
 ■O- ^^ ^Zj! /www a \AA^A^ I ;WW^\ I '^ ' '^ l—l A LI ID A/VWW 
 
 1 1 '^^i ' JL|\ 
 
 -f— j^/wvwv I III IT i^ 
 
 THE SEVENTH HOUE. 
 
 II. — From the Leyden Papyrus, T. 71. 
 
 Xw I Aw^ I /www J^ IJ J^ D X .<2>- rJ 
 
 c^ \-j /www 
 
 l^^lTli±!J.1L!:i^^l
 
 28 THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 ii1'i^ik^i^1L!T^^^ 
 
 ^Ili^i^^k^O D^k 
 
 _ffi^ /wwvN ^ I /wwv^ J\ I /.v.-As <:ii^ <:ii> _Jl \\ U 
 
 A/^\AAA 
 
 
 A/WNAft 
 
 1 I iD D """"'JS^^:^<z^O 
 
 fBlK^m^k.^l^^liil 
 
 
 t r-^-^ /WWVA '^^.S'^ I y U I I ^ ^ I CrZl 1 AAAAA^ 

 
 THE SEVENTH HOUR 29 
 
 
 o 
 
 r^] ill! ^i'^-^kl I :r: ^2 
 
 -f- JL X W ^ ooL <==> ^ I ^,vwvs 
 
 
 is^k/^^^^^ 
 
 l^k^JC^^'^"^ 
 
 I /W\/W\ — - 
 
 ^ I <C3> D 
 
 X -<E>- ^ I 1 _A I AAV^ _B^ ^ I /VWWS _B^ '''^^^ 
 
 AA/VV\A A/WvAA 
 
 1Ei=lf^°y^^^i^ 
 
 
 I /I o 
 
 >o
 
 30 THE BOOK OF AM-TL'AT — SUMMARY 
 
 AAftAAA 
 
 
 Fro^flflSIP, 
 
 X. 
 
 THE EIGHTH HOUE. 
 
 When llie majesty f»f this y;reat god liatli taken up 
 his p()sitii)ii in the secret Circles of tliosc who are in 
 their sand, he sendeth forth words to tliem from out of 
 his Boat, and the gods tow along him that is in the 
 holy emlnace (?) of the serpent Mehen. 
 
 Aha-an-ukt-f is the name of the gate of this City. 
 
 Tebat-neteru-set is the name of this City. 
 
 As for the secret Circle of Amextet, this great god 
 makcth his way over it in his I»oat, 1iy means of the 
 towing of the gods who are in the 'Puat. 
 
 Whosoever shall make [a copy of] these things 
 according to the similitude which is in writing on the 
 north [wall] of the Hidden Palace in the Tuat, and 
 whosoever shall know them by their names, shall lie 
 in the condition of one wlio is fully })ro\ided witli 
 swathings on the earth, and he shall never ])e repulsed 
 at the secret gates, and he sliall have abundant offerings 
 in the great funeral hall regularly and unfailingly for 
 millions of years. 
 
 Neht-usha is the name of |]ic hmn' «.r ihe night 
 which guidcth this great god.
 
 THE EIGHTH HOUR 3I 
 
 THE EIGHTH HOUK. 
 From the Leyden Papyrus, T. 71. 
 
 ■— >-^ A <=^ r-w-i I 
 I 
 
 <3. f^ I on^^ % fk, n_^ 2^.=^ -^^ H 
 
 CZ:> _2fl0 1lllllijl=i:t=f /wwvv 1 I I -(J- 
 
 j ^' 
 
 ^ik^i:r:^Ti^k 
 
 
 
 [-^^-| /wwNA R ^ ^ Qqi g 
 
 <= o I iQ n 1 AA.«/« (iiia -Ki\ H .m i^^T Jf =5^ 
 
 P 
 
 
 AAA/VAA _ _ 
 
 ili A A 
 
 ^§^^ 
 
 -A "^ n n .1 1k ^^^ ri^ I 
 
 TPJ*^ 
 
 I I I ■— '•^ I <z> V— <rr> A ^ n 
 
 ^fx 5 I f 
 
 AAAAA^ 
 
 D©
 
 ^2 THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 <=. o ^ 
 
 
 THE NINTH HOUll. 
 
 AVlicn the majesty of this great god hath taken up 
 his position in this Circle, he scndeth forth words 
 from his Boat to the gods who dwell therein, and the 
 sailors join the Boat of this great god in this City. 
 
 Saa-keb is the name of the gate of this City through 
 which this great god passcth to take up his position on 
 the stream which is in this City. 
 
 Bes-aru is the name of this City, which is the 
 secret Circle of Amentet, wherein take up their 
 positions in the Tuat this great god and his sailors. 
 
 Whosoever maketh [a copy of] these things in their 
 names according to the similitudes whicli are in writing 
 on the east [wall] of the Hidden Palace of the 'Fuat, 
 and whosoever knoweth their names upon earth, and 
 knoweth their hal)itations in Amentct, shall rest in his 
 habitation in the 'Puat, and he shall stand up among 
 the lords of the provisions of the gods, and his voice 
 shall be madt before the ichatcha beings on the day 
 of the reckoning of Tharaoh (literally, tlie thrice 
 great liouse). Ami these tilings shall act as magical 
 protectors to him that knoweth them upon earth. 
 
 Mak-NEI5-s is the name of the hour of (ho night 
 which guideth this great god in this Circle.
 
 THE NINTH HOUR 
 
 THE NINTH HOUR. 
 From the Leyden Papyrus, T. 71. 
 
 33 
 
 I =1 I D 
 
 D AAArt/W A /W^A/V\ I wvvv\ 
 
 i^ 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 
 /VWVAA AA/NAAA 
 
 AA/WV\ I '^ ' I 
 
 
 I 1 /WW«A '^ I AAAAAA 
 
 I I I AA/V\AA 
 
 ^ '::i 
 
 o 
 
 5^ ^ ^ ,-il-^ C3 
 
 I D 
 
 k^^^^Siik 
 
 AAAAAA I 1 I 
 
 1 
 
 ^kll=IkffiliTfJ^i7^^ 
 
 
 
 ^VWVA I I I I I g r^-^ ^111 
 
 1=3] 
 
 f\/^^ 
 
 D ^ 
 
 [irz] 
 
 ^ 
 
 7^ 
 
 ii4>yi^kii°^^ 
 
 o - ^ I O 
 
 VOL. II. 
 
 eJiiiJ) I — hH HJ I I 
 D
 
 34 THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 AAAA/VA 
 AAAAAA 
 
 ^ 
 
 AAAAA^ ' ' 
 
 n ^ ^ =^ -^^ .^. ^ ^ 
 
 I I S /WWVS O ^ O ^ 
 
 ■^ i -=>, S;^ ^1 
 
 AAAAAA ' '^ I _Cr^ <^ - •-* O AAA/•^^ L— . 
 
 W' 
 
 THE TENTH HOUK. 
 
 Tlie majesty of this great god taketli up his position 
 in this Circle, and he sendeth forth words to the gods 
 wlio are in it. 
 
 Aa-kiieperu-mes-aru is the name of the gate of 
 this City through which this great god passeth. 
 
 Metch-qa-utebu is the name of this City. [This is] 
 the secret Circle of Amentet whereto Kiiepera joineth 
 himself before Ra, and the gods, and the spirits, and 
 the dead cry out from it over the secret representa- 
 tions (or, images) of Akert. 
 
 Whosoever shall make [a copy of] these [repre- 
 sentations] according to the figures which are 
 depicted on the cast [wall] of Anient, and whosoever 
 knoweth them l)y their names shall journey round 
 about in the Tuat, and shall travel through it, and 
 he shall not be driven back, and he sliall flourish 
 with Rfi. 
 
 TEiNTKNIT-hesq-kiiakabu is the name of the hour of 
 the night which guidcth this great god tlirougli the 
 secret ways of this City.
 
 THE TENTH HOUR 
 
 THE TENTH HOUR 
 
 Fkom the Levpen Papykus, T. 71. 
 
 35 
 
 /VVVW\ A A/V\A/\A I AAAAA^ 
 
 1 
 
 D 
 
 A o£=3 
 
 1^ 
 
 ^ I 
 
 
 I I I AAAA/V\ 
 
 "Emmr wwv\ 
 
 I • * * I AAAAAA 
 
 ^ I 
 
 n I I 
 
 
 I' I 
 
 <::^ I' Ci£^ci D 
 
 O 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 III 
 
 ^'^ 
 
 V I 
 
 vW ) 
 
 I CZEZ! .-^'•^ 
 
 
 
 
 1 AAAAAA n-^^^ 1 JT 
 
 _^ /wwvA 7^ ^ m ^5 I 
 
 .f^/V^V\ I I I _Cr^ AAAAAA V^ X 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 7^ 
 
 "=^ 
 
 ^1 
 
 ^.^! 
 
 AAA/NAA AA/VW\ I V 
 
 AAAAAA ^ O I ^ 111 
 
 I D 
 
 fl 
 
 I 1 W I . w , 
 1 = ' ' I 
 
 I ^^^ AWVSA
 
 36 THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 
 THE ELEVENTH HOUR 
 
 The majesty of this great god taketh up his position 
 in this Circle, and he seudeth forth words unto the 
 gods who are therein, 
 
 Sekiiex-Tuatiu is tlio name of tlie gate of this City 
 thruugh which this great god passeth. 
 
 EE-EN-gERERT-Ai'T-KiiAT is the name of tliis City. 
 [This is] the secret Circle of the Tuat into which this 
 great god passeth on his way, and [lie] cometh forth 
 at the eastern mountain of the sky, the eater of 
 eternity. Tlie form thereof is in the presence of the 
 serpent I'etka, whicli dwcUeUi in this City, and they 
 (i.e., the gods) place themselves in the train of [lla] 
 when the birth of Kiiepeu upon earth is about to take 
 place. 
 
 Whosoever shall make [a copy] of these [representa- 
 tions] according to the figures wliich are depicted on 
 the east [wall] of the palace of Anient in the hidden 
 [places] of tlic Tuat, and whosoever knoweth tlieni 
 shall 1)C in the position of him tliat divideth his 
 offering, and of him who is a spirit who is suitably 
 equipped [to travel] botli in lioaven and upon oavUi, 
 regularly and unceasingly. 
 
 SEBIT-NEB-UAA-KIIESEF-SElUr-E.M-rKKT-F is tliO name 
 of the hour of the nii^ht which uiiidrth lliis great god 
 in this Circle.
 
 THE ELEVENTH HOUR 37 
 
 THE ELEVENTH HOUR. 
 From the Leyden Tapykus, T. 71. 
 
 C^ LI A/SAAAA A /WNA/V\ I VVsAAAA 
 
 fij ^^ @ s=3 <z=> ^^^ ^ I A n "^ o ,^A^ ^ 
 
 O D 
 
 
 
 ji I /wwvA - — a _^f^ U— »— 7i _M^ cnn] 
 
 
 
 
 AAAAAA AA/v/v\A '^^ ^ I ' ■* 
 
 /V,/\W\ 
 
 O ^ O ^ 
 
 
 JB^ <=> O /vwwv I J)
 
 38 THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 
 THE TWELFTH HOUR. 
 
 The majesty of tliis great god takctli up his position 
 iu this Circle at the limits of tlic tliick darkness, and 
 this great god is born under the form of KilEPEKA in 
 this Circle. The gods Nu and Am.mui, and Heh and 
 Heh[ut] are in this Circle at the birth of this great 
 god, wlien he maketli his appearance from the Tuat, 
 and taketh up liis i)lacc in the Matet Boat, and riseth 
 from between the thighs of the goddess Nut. 
 
 TiiENEN-NETERU is the name of the gate of this City. 
 
 KiiEPEU-KEKUl-KiiA-MESTi is the name of this City. 
 [Tins is] the secret Circle of the Tuat, wherein this 
 great god is born, wlien he maketh his appearance in 
 Nu, and taketli up liis place in the body of NuT. 
 
 Whosoever shall make [a c(>})y] of these [representa- 
 tions] according to the figures which are depicted on 
 the east [wall] of the palace of Anient of the Tuat, 
 tliey sliall be magical protectors to him tliat knoweth 
 them upon earth, linth in heaven and on eailh. 
 
 At tliis point tlie light l)eginncth [to come], and it is 
 the end of tlic thick darkness which Ka travelleth 
 through in Amentet, and of the secret matters wliich 
 this great god performed Ihiicin. Me who halh no 
 knowledge of the wh(jle(:') or part^:') of the secret
 
 THE TWELFTH HOUR 39 
 
 representations of the Tuat, shall be condemned to 
 destruction. 
 
 Whosoever shall make [a copy] of these [representa- 
 tions] according to this copy of what is in the Ament 
 of the Tuat, [which] cannot be looked at or seen, and 
 whosoever shall know these secret images shall be 
 in the condition of the spirit who is equipped [for 
 journeying], and shall come forth [from] and shall 
 descend into the Tuat, and shall hold converse with 
 the men and women who live [there] regularly and 
 unfailingly, millions of times. 
 
 THE TWELFTH HOUR. 
 
 From the Leyden Papyrus, T. 71. 
 
 
 ^ ^cr^^°^^ ^^^ 
 
 ^4lli_Qnl\ H^^Vx^ ^ 
 
 
 \\ vj^i^ \ A i_jL AVvvvv _££n^ AWWv ^ I 
 
 
 U I LJ imiiiir wwv, <=i , w^w. <rr> w Ja (^
 
 40 
 
 THE BOOK OF AM-TUAT — SUMMARY 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 \-^m 
 
 I D 
 
 
 O ':^ 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 
 I D ^ 
 
 I AAAAA^ ^ 
 
 <^ 
 
 I I 
 
 I I I 
 
 ® , \ ^ 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 Si \\ 
 
 -^^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ! I I I 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 z=i ^ Yi ^^^7 D X U I /wwvA ^^ /v^ 1 Jr ^ E 
 
 ^^ .Bfvli' II 1 AVWVA # 1 \ ,-^-^ AAAAAA _B^ 1 t=^?^ I '^i CTTD 
 
 'ft* 
 
 
 
 
 7^
 
 THE BOOK OF GATES
 
 THE BOOK OF GATES 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 THE ALABASTEK SAKCOPHAGUS OF SETI I. 
 
 The text uf the " Book of Gates," printed in the 
 following pages, is taken from tlie alabaster sarcophagus 
 of king Seti I., B.C. 1370, which is preserved in the 
 Museum of Sir John Soane, at 13, Lincoln's Inn Fields. 
 This sarcophagus is, undoubtedly, one of the chief 
 authorities for the text of that remarkable book ; 
 but before any attempt is made to describe the 
 arrangement of the scenes and the inscriptions which 
 accompany them, it will be well to recall tlie principal 
 facts connected with its discovery by Giovanni Battista 
 Belzoni, who has fortunately placed them on record in 
 his Narrative of the Operations and recent discoveries 
 icithin the iiyramids, temples, tombs and Excavations 
 in Egypt and Nuhia, London, 1820, p. 233 ff. In 
 October, 1815, Belzoni began to excav^ate in the Biban- 
 al-Muluk, i.e., the Valley of the Tombs of the Kings, 
 on the western bank of the Nile at Thebes, and in tlie
 
 44 THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI I. 
 
 bed of a watercourse lie found a spot where the ground 
 bore traces of luiving been "moved." On the 19th of 
 the montli liis workmen made a way through the sand 
 and fragments of stone wliich liad been piled up 
 there, and entered the first corridor or passage of a 
 magnificent tomb, w'liieli he soon discovered to have 
 been made for one of the great kings of Egypt. A 
 second corridor led him to a square chamber which, 
 being thirty feet deep, formed a serious obstacle in 
 the way ol any unauthorized intruder, and served to 
 catch any rain-water which might make its way down 
 the corridors from the entrance. Beyond this chamlier 
 are two halls, and from the first of these Belzoni 
 passed through other corridors and rooms until he 
 entered the vaulted chamber in which stood the 
 sarcophagus.^ The sarcophagus chamber is situated at 
 a distance of 320 feet from tlie entrance to the first 
 Cfjrridor, and is 180 feet l)elow the level of the ground. 
 Belzoni succeeded in l)ringing the sarcophagus from 
 its chamber into tlie light of day without injury, and 
 in due course it arrived in England ; the negotiations 
 which he opened with the Trustees of tlie British 
 Museum, to whom its purchase was first proposed, fell 
 through, and he subsequently sold it to Sir John 
 Soane, it is said for the sum of £2000. An examina- 
 tion of the sarcophagus shows that both it and its cover 
 were Iiollowed out of mitnolllliic li](icl<s ol" alabaster, 
 
 ' Ah IJclzdiii's iiarnilivc is nl" iiitcri-st, his aci-tMiiit of liis discovoiy 
 of Si'ti'.s tomb ia j^ivt'ii in tin- Aj^K'Hilix to lliia (Jli!i|itc'r.
 
 DISCOVERY or AND DESCRIPTION 45 
 
 and it is i)iul»al>lo, as ]\Ir. Sliaipe says,^ tliat these were 
 quarried iii the iiiouiitaius near Alaljastronpulis, i.e., 
 the district whicli was known to the Egyptians by 
 
 the name of Het-niil), J r^;;;j^ C=C^, and is situated 
 
 near tlie ruins known in modern times l)y the name 
 of Tell al-*Amarna. In the Het-nub quarries large 
 numl)ers of inscriptions, written chietly in the hieratic 
 cliaracter, have been found, and from the interesting 
 selection from these puljlislicd by Messrs. lilackden 
 and Fraser, we learn that several kings of the Ancient 
 and Middle Empires carried on works in them, no 
 doubt fur the purpose of obtaining alabaster for funeral 
 purposes. The sarcophagus is 9 ft. 4 in. lung, 3 ft. 8 in. 
 wide, in the widest part, and 2ft. Sin. high at the 
 shoulders, and 2 ft. 3 in. at the feet ; the cover is 
 1 ft. 3 in. high. The thickness of the alabaster varies 
 from 2^ to 4 inches. The skill of the mason who 
 succeeded in hollowing the blocks without breaking, 
 or even cracking them, is marvellous, and the remains 
 of holes nearly one inch in diameter suggest that the 
 drill was as useful to him as the chisel and mallet in 
 hollowing out the blocks. When the sarcophagus and 
 its cover were finally shaped and polished, they were 
 handed over to an artisan who was skilled in cutting 
 hieroglyphics and figures of the gods, «S:c., in stone, and 
 both the insides and uutsides were covered by him 
 
 ' The Alabaster Sarcophagus of Oimeneptliah I., King of Egypt. 
 London, 1864, p. 14.
 
 46 THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI I. 
 
 with inscriptions and vignettes and mythological scenes 
 wliich illustrated them. l>oth inscriptions and scenes 
 were then filled in with a kind of paint made from 
 some preparation of copper, and the vi^■id bluish green 
 colour of this paint must have formed a striking 
 contrast to tlio lailliaut whiteness of the alabaster 
 when fresh from the quarry. At the present time 
 large numbers of cliaracters and figures are denuded 
 of their colour, and those in which it still remains are 
 much discoloured by L(iiul(jn ft»g and soot. 
 
 The first to attempt to describe the contents of the 
 texts and scenes on the sarcophagus of Seti I. was the 
 late Samuel Sbarpe, who, witli the late Jost^ph Uonomi, 
 published "The Alabaster Sarcophagus of Oimen- 
 epthali I., King of Egypt," Lmidon, 1(SG4, 4to; the 
 former was responsible for the letterpress, and the 
 latter for the plates of scenes and texts. For some 
 reason whidi it is not easy to understand, Mr. Sharpe 
 decided that the hieroglyphic characters which formed 
 the prenomen of the king for whom tlie sarcophagus was 
 made were to be read " Oimcncpthali," a result which 
 he obtained by assigning tlie phonetic value of to 
 
 tlic hierogly})liic' sign for Osiris Ijj. The jn-oiujnien is 
 
 someti mes written (U I ^^^^] , ,„• (^|f|i^, 
 
 MEK-EN-rTAU, or Skti-mkn'-ex-Ptaij. Mr. Sliarpe did 
 not, a])]»arently, iv.ilizr Ihai both the signs W and ij|
 
 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 47 
 
 were to be read " Set," and lie gave to the first the 
 phonetic value of A and to the second the value of ; 
 he next identified " Aimenepthah " or " Oimenepthah " 
 with tlie AnicMKtpliath of Manetho, and the Cho- 
 niaepthah uf Eratosthenes, saying, "hence arises the 
 support to our reading his name (i.e., the king's) 
 Oimenepthah." I'assing over Mr. Sharpe's further 
 remarks, which assert that the sarcopliagus was made 
 in the year B.C. 1175 (!), we nmst consider briefly the 
 arrangement of the texts and scenes upon tlie insides 
 and outsides of tlie sarcophagus and its covers. On 
 the upper outside edge of the sarcophagus runs a 
 single line of hieroglyphics which contains speeches 
 supposed to be made to the deceased by the four 
 children of Horus ; this line is in two sections, each of 
 which begins at the right hand side of the head, and 
 ends at the left hand side of the " foot. Below this line 
 of hieroglyphics are five large scenes, each of which is 
 divided into three registers, and these are enclosed 
 between two dotted bands which are intended to 
 represent the borders of the " Valley of the Other 
 World." On the inside of the sarcophagus are also five 
 scenes, but there is no line of hieroglyphics rimning 
 along the upper edge. On the bottom of the sarco- 
 phagus is a finely cut figure of the goddess Nut, and 
 round and about her are texts selected from the 
 Theban Kecension of the Booh of the Dead; on 
 the inside of the cover is a figure of the goddess 
 Nut, with arms outstretched. On the outside of the
 
 48 
 
 THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI I. 
 
 cover, ill uddition to the texts wliieli record the names 
 and titles of tlie deceased, are inscribed two large 
 scenes, each of which is divided into three registers, 
 like those inside and outside the sarcophagus. 
 
 The line of text on the upper outside edge reads : — 
 
 ^ \ 
 
 
 tM-\rA 
 
 D (^ 
 
 
 <= 
 
 
 
 "^"« 
 
 u 
 
 'iY^^iT:^:^^'^" '" ' 
 
 
 '::z:^ 
 
 ys- 
 
 
 fTJ^*J^JkJ^J1^^^Jii 
 
 MI-«llgK«iEIOIf'?k 
 
 o
 
 SPEECHES OF THE CHILDREN OF HORUS 49 
 
 
 MOO 
 
 
 AA/VAAA 
 /VS/VV>A 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 I I I — ^ 
 
 
 -;=^ I iliii e 
 
 
 "= em 
 
 ®? 
 
 lo5? 
 
 Iff 8 " 
 
 riP^jQEi 
 
 
 W A 
 
 ^^Q. 
 
 VOL. IL
 
 50 THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI I. 
 
 ^\ 
 
 j\ 
 
 fSiT):f?dii^o 
 
 '=^.m.z::z.^^^ I" -5^ 1 (cA^^ n \ t® 
 
 AAA/V^A 
 
 
 AAAA/Vv 
 
 01?E- 
 
 I. Speech of Mestha : " I am Mestha, I am [thy] son, 
 " Osiris, king, lord of the two h\nds, Men-Maat-Ka, 
 " whose word is madi, son of the Smi, Seti Mer-en-Ptah, 
 " whose word is madt, and I have come so that I 
 " may be among those who protect thee. I make to 
 " flourish thy house, which shall be doubly established, 
 "by the command of Ptali, by the command of Ea 
 " himself." 
 
 Speech of Anpu : " I am Anpu, who dwelleth in (or, 
 " with) the funeral chest." He saith, " Mother Isis 
 
 " descendeth bandages for me, Osiris, king 
 
 " Men-Maat-Ea, whose word is macd, son of the Sun, 
 " Seti Mer-cn-Ptah, whose word is madi, from him 
 " that worketh against mo." 
 
 Speech of Tuamatef : " I am Tuamatef, I am thy 
 " son Horus, I love thee, and I have come to avenge 
 " thee, Osiris, upon him that would work his wicked-
 
 SPEECHES OF THE CHILDREN OF HORUS 5I 
 
 "ness upon thee, and I will set him under thy feet 
 "for ever, Osiris, king, lord of the two lands, Men- 
 "Maat-Ea, son of the Sim, [proceeding] from his 
 " body, loving him, lord of crowns (or, risings) Seti 
 " Mer-en-Ptah, whose word is madt, before the Great 
 "God." 
 
 To be said : " Ea liveth, the Tortoise dieth ! Strong 
 
 "are the members of Osiris, king Meu-Maat- 
 
 "Ea, whose word is madt, for Qebhsennuf guardeth 
 " them. Ea liveth, the Tortoise dieth ! In a sound 
 " state is he who is in the sarcophagus, in a sound state 
 " is he who is in the sarcophagus, that is to say, the 
 "son of the Sun, Seti Mer-en-Ptah, whose word is 
 " madt." 
 
 Speech of Nut : Nut, the great one of Seb, saith : 
 " Osiris, king, lord of the two lands, Men-Maat-Ea, 
 " whose word is madt, who loveth me, I give unto 
 " thee purity on the earth, and splendour (or, glory) 
 "in the heavens, and I give unto thee thy head for 
 " ever." 
 
 II. Speech of Nut, who is over the Hennu Boat: 
 "This is my son, Osiris, king, Men-Maat-Ea, whose 
 "word is madt. His father Shu loveth him, and his 
 " mother Nut loveth him, Osiris, son of Ea, Seti Mer- 
 " en-Ptah, whose word is madt." 
 
 Speech of Hapi : " I am Hapi. I have come that I 
 "might be among those who protect thee, I bind 
 " together for thee thy head, [and thy members, smiting 
 " down for thee thine enemies beneath thee, and I give
 
 52 THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI I. 
 
 " thee] ^ thy head, Osiris, king, Men-Maat-Ea, whose 
 " word is madt, son of Ka, Seti Mer-en-Ptah, whose 
 " word is inadt." 
 
 Speech of Anpu, the Governor of the divine honse : 
 " I am Anpn, the Governor of the divine honse. 
 " Osiris, king, lord of the two lands, Men-Maat-Ka, 
 " whose word is madt, son of the Sun, [proceeding] 
 " from his body, the lord of crowns, Seti Mer-en-Ptah, 
 " whose word is madt, the Shennu beings go roinid 
 "about thee, and thy members remain uninjured, 
 " Osiris, king, Men-]\Iaat-Pia, whose word is madt for 
 " ever." 
 
 Speech of Qebhsennuf : " I am thy sun, I have 
 " come that I might be among those who protect 
 " thee. I gather together for thee thy bones, and 
 " I piece together for thee thy limbs. I bring unto 
 " thee thy heart, and I set it upon its seat in thy 
 " body. I make to flourish (or, germinate) for thee thy 
 " house after thee, [0 tliou who] liv[est] for ever." 
 
 To be said : " Rjl liveth, the Tortoise dieth ! Let 
 " enter the bones of Osiris, king Men-Maat-Ea, whose 
 " word is madt, the son of the Sun, Seti Mer-en-Ptah, 
 " whose word is madt, let them enter into their founda- 
 " tions. Pure is the dead body wliich is in the earth, 
 
 " Supplying the words ^ ^^ X ^ ^^ j!^ '^^ '^^- 
 
 '^ -^ ~» from the Wfll-kiiown ypecch on tlio 
 
 Caii02)ic jars.
 
 THE FIGURE OF NUT 53 
 
 " and pure are the hones of Osms, kmg Men-Maat-Ra, 
 " whose word is madt, like Ra [for ever !]." 
 
 On the hottoni of the sarcophagus is a large, full- 
 length figure of the goddess Nut, who is depicted in 
 the form of a woman with her arms ready to embrace 
 the body of the king. Her face and the lower parts of 
 the body below the waist are in profile, but she has a 
 front chest, front shoulders, and a front eye. Her feet 
 are represented as if each was a right foot, and each 
 only shows the great toe. One breast is only shown. 
 The hair of the goddess is long and falls over her back 
 and shoulders ; it is held in position over her forehead 
 by a bandlet. She wears a deep collar or necklace, 
 and a closely-fitting feather-work tunic which extends 
 from her breast to her ankles ; the latter is supported 
 by two shoulder straps, each of which is fastened with 
 a buckle on the shoulder. She has anklets on her legs, 
 and bracelets on her wrists, and armlets on her arms. 
 The inscriptions which are cut above the head, and at 
 both sides, and under the feet of the goddess contain 
 addresses to the king by the great gods of tlie sky, and 
 extracts from the Boole of the Dead ; they read : —
 
 54 the sarcophagus of seti i. 
 
 Inscription on the bottom of the Sarcophagus of 
 Seti I. 
 
 ^ ^^ c^ .e ^^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 -<2^
 
 speeches of seb, nut, etc. 55 
 
 Inscription on the bottom of the Sahcophagus of 
 Seti I. 
 
 I. The words of Osiris the king, the lord of the two 
 lands, Men-Maat-Ea, whose word is madf, the son of 
 lia (i.e., the Sun), Seti Mer-en-Ptah, whose word is 
 madt, who saith, " thou goddess Nut, support thou 
 " me, for I am thy son. Destroy thou my defects of 
 " immobility, together with those who produce them." 
 
 II. The goddess Nut, who dwelleth in Het-Hennu, 
 saith, "This [is my] son Osiris, the king, the lord 
 " of the two lands, Men-Maat-Ea, whose word is 
 " madt, the son of Ea, [proceeding] from his body, 
 " who loveth him, the lord of crowns, Osiris, Seti 
 " Mek-en-I'tah." 
 
 III. The god See saith, "This [is my] son Men- 
 "Maat-Ea, who loveth me. I have given unto him 
 "purity upon earth, and glory in heaven, him the 
 " Osiris, king, the lord of the two lands, Men-Maat-Ea, 
 " whose word is madt, the son of Ea, the lover of Nut, 
 "that is to say, Seti Mer-en-Ptah, whose word is 
 " madf, before the lords of the ""Puat." 
 
 IV. Words which are to be said : — " Osiris, king, 
 " lord of the two lands, Men-Maat-Ea, whose word is 
 " madf, the son of Ea, [proceeding] from his body, that 
 "is to say, Seti Mer-en-Ptah, whose word is madf. 
 " Thy mother Nut putteth forth [her] two hands and 
 "arms over thee, Osiris, king, lord of the two lands, 
 " Men-Maat-Ea, whose word is madf, son of Ea,
 
 56 
 
 IT 
 
 crz\ 
 
 j\ ^ 
 
 THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI I 
 
 (MIEI 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 I I I 
 
 I I I 
 
 w 
 
 ^ o 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^¥^,(2iiil^] 
 
 B 7^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 fit 
 
 ^ o 
 
 " 
 
 in 
 
 1 1 ^^;:^a 
 
 krrvis^ikrii^^
 
 SPEECH OF NUT 57 
 
 "wlioiii he loveth, lord of diadems, Seti Mek-en- 
 "Ptah, whose word is madt. Thy mother NuT 
 "hath added the magical powers wliich are thiue, 
 "and thou art in her arms, and thou shalt never 
 "die. Lifted up and driven away are the calamities 
 "which were to thee, and they shall never [more] 
 "come to thee, and shall never draw nigh unto 
 "thee, Osiris, king, the lord of the two lands, Men- 
 "Maat-Ra, whose word is madt. Horus hath taken 
 "up his stand behind thee, Osiris, son of Ea, lord 
 "of diadems, Seti Mek-en-Ptaii, whose word is 
 "madt, for thy mother Nut hath come unto thee; 
 " she hath purified (or, washed) thee, she hath united 
 "herself to thee, she hath supplied thee as a 
 "»od, and thou art alive and stablished among the 
 " gods."' 
 
 V. The great goddess Xut saith, " I have endowed 
 " him with a soul, I have endowed him with a spirit, 
 "and I have given him power in the body of his 
 "mother Tefnut, I who was never brought forth. I 
 "have come, and I have united myself to Osmis, 
 " the king, the lord of the two lands, Men-Maat-Ea, 
 " whose word is madt, the son of Pta, the lord of 
 "diadems, Seti Mer-en-Ptati, whose word is viadt, 
 "with life, stability, and power. He shall not 
 "die. I am Nut of the mighty heart, and I took 
 "up my being in the body of my mother Tefnut 
 "in my name of Nut; over my mother none hath
 
 58 
 
 
 THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI I. 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 9 ^|?^k^o^^:r:«^^ 
 
 A/V\AAA /WAAA I I I I I _ZIr\S /^/V^^^ /I — - ll It \ J 
 
 ^ I 
 
 
 OR V^ 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 T=T 
 
 
 35 S 
 
 QUI 
 
 (SMlil 
 
 I I I © III 
 
 (3 III 
 
 -^^^^.Afllil'^''^ 
 
 D 
 
 ^ni 
 
 II I /vvvvv\ 
 II A/V\AAA 
 
 ^ I I 

 
 BOOK OF THE DEAD — CHAPTER LXXII. 59 
 
 " gained the mastery. I have filled every place with my 
 " beneficence, and I have led captive the whole earth ; 
 " I have led captive the South and the North, and I 
 " have gathered together the things which are into my 
 " arms to vivify Osiris, the king, tlie lord of the two 
 " lands, Men-Maat-Ra, the son of the Sun, [proceeding] 
 " from his body, the lover of Seker, the lord of diadems, 
 " the governor whose heart is glad, Seti Mer-ex-Ptaii, 
 " whose word is madt. His soul shall live for ever ! " 
 
 VI. ["Nut,"] saith Osiris, the king Men-Maat-Ea, 
 whose word is madt, " Raise thou me up ! I am [thy] 
 "son, set thou free him whose heart is at rest from 
 " that wliieh maketh [it to be still]." 
 
 VII. Osiris, the king, the lord of the two lands, 
 Mex-Maat-Ra, whose word is madt, the son of the 
 Sun, loving him, Seti Mer-en-Ptah, saith the 
 
 Chapter of Coming Forth by Day and of Making a 
 AVay Through Ammehet.^ 
 
 Saith Osiris, the king, the lord of the two lands, Men- 
 Maat-Ra, whose word is madt, the son of the Sun, [pro- 
 ceeding] from his body, loving him, the lord of crowns, 
 Seti Mer-en-Ptah, whose word is madt, " Homage to 
 " you, ye lords of madt, wlio are free from iniquity, 
 "who exist and live for ever and to the double henti 
 " period of everlastingness, Men-Maat-Ra, whose word 
 " is madt, the son of the Sun, [proceeding] from his body, 
 " loving liiin, the lord of diadems, Seti Mer-en-Ptah, 
 
 ' This is Chapter LXXII. of the Book of the Dead.
 
 6o THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI I. 
 
 
 QUI 
 
 
 I I I 
 
 -^5==. r~w~i D 
 
 AA/v^A^ 
 
 AWV\^ 1 S /\A/VW\ 
 
 w 
 
 1 ! 
 
 
 I I ^ 
 
 
 I ^^^ 
 
 I I I I 
 
 1¥ 
 
 ¥?1J°1fl 
 
 I I I 
 
 cn^^ 
 
 I I I 
 
 <£? 
 
 ^ rK fl ^ ^ ^^ 
 
 Q X 
 
 I I I 
 
 
 Tnnmr s==5 .^ju. s. Q s=> — 
 
 
 v*^ A VA ^^ aaaaaJ c=-c> I ^ -^^ o=D 
 
 I 
 
 =0=111
 
 BOOK OF THE DEAD — CHAPTER LXXII. 6l 
 
 " whose word is madt, before you hath become a 
 " khic (i.e., a spirit) in his attributes, he hath gained 
 " the mastery through his words of power, and he 
 "is laden with his splendours. deliver ye the 
 " Osiris, the king, the lord of the two lands, Men- 
 " Maat-Ea, whose word is madt, the son of the sun, 
 "the lord of diadems, Seti Mer-en-Ptah, whose 
 "word is madt, from the Crocodile of this Pool of 
 "Maati. He hath his mouth, let him speak there- 
 " with. Let there be granted unto him broad-handed- 
 "ness in your presence, because I know you, and I 
 "know your names. I know this great god unto 
 "whose nostrils ye present offerings of tchefau. 
 "Rekem is his name. He maketh a way through 
 " the eastern horizon of heaven. PtEKEM departeth 
 "and I also depart; he is strong and I am strong. 
 " let me not be destroyed in the ]\Iesqet Chamber. 
 "Let not the Sebau fiends gain the mastery over 
 "me. Drive not ye mc away from your Gates, 
 "and shut not fast your arms against the Osiris, 
 " the king, the lord of the two lands, Men-]\Iaat- 
 "Ra, whose word is madt, the son of the Sun, [pro- 
 "ceed?ug] from his body, loving him, the lord of 
 "diadems, Seti Mer-en-Ptah, whose word is madt, 
 "because [my] bread is in the city of Pe,^ and my 
 " ale is in the city of Tep, and my arms are united 
 
 ' Pe and Tep formed a double city in the Delta.
 
 62 
 
 D© 
 
 r^"n II /WSAAA 1 
 
 
 AA/Vv\A 
 
 THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI I. 
 
 cz> \> "ill ■ otib 1 w r ()5it> 
 
 
 ^ I ^D <r=> 
 
 
 II I I ^ 
 
 Q 
 Q 
 Q 
 
 
 
 ®s^i-fiM;fi:k¥?^5 
 
 
 
 ^AAAA^ 
 
 o QUI 
 
 — X n /W^TJV^ '^ ^ / AAAAAA a;^_^ 
 
 ra D 

 
 BOOK OF THE DEAD — CHAPTER LXXII, 63 
 
 " in the divine house which my father hath given nnto 
 " me. He hath stablished for me a house in the high 
 "place of the lands, and tlierc are wheat and barley 
 " therein, tlic quantity of which is unknown. The son 
 " of my body acteth for me there as hher-hch} Grant 
 "ye unto me sepulchral offerings, that is to say, 
 " incense, and merhet unguent, and all beautiful and 
 "pure things of every kind whereon tlie God liveth. 
 " Osiris, the king, ]\Ien-Maat-1Ia, whoso word is madt, 
 " the son of tlie Sun, [proceeding] from his body, loving 
 "him, the lord of diadems, the ruler of joy of heart, 
 " Seti Mek-en-Ptaij, whose word is madt, existcth for 
 " ever in all the transformations whicli it pleaseth 
 " [him to make]. He floateth down the river, he saileth 
 "up into Sekhet-Aaeu," he reacheth Sekiiet-^Ietep.'^ 
 " I am the double Lion-god." ^ 
 
 VIII. Saith Osiris, the king, the lord of the two 
 lands, Men-Maat-Ra, whose word is madt, son of the 
 Sun, loving him, Seti Mer-en-Ptah, whose word is 
 madt : — " ward off that destroyer from my father 
 " Osiris, the king, the lord of the two lands, Men-Maat- 
 " Ea, whose word is maclt, and let his divine protection 
 " be under my legs, and let them live. Strengthen 
 " thou Osiris, son of the Sun, lord of diadems, Seti Mee- 
 '■' en-Ptaii, whose word is madt, with thy hand. Grasp 
 " thou bim with thy hand, let him enter thy hand, let 
 
 ' The kher-heb was the priestly official who read the funeral sei'vicc. 
 =" I.e., the Field of Reeds. =* I.e., the Field of Peace. 
 
 * I.e., Shu and Tefnut.
 
 64 
 
 THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI I. 
 
 
 ^^ ni] \\ 
 
 ^ 
 
 C3 
 
 ^^ 
 
 Q 
 
 
 o 
 
 ^^---^ „ 
 
 .=^ <=^ I oil I ' s <c:^ rv/\^ ' 
 
 I »^ ij ^ J j> srT\ (Ik 1 1 Q J 
 
 j^Zi.^i^j^^-^ 
 
 
 ^^^z::^ ^ 
 
 7^ 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 ^ff3^^ 
 
 ^VI^P^^P^^^LL'IE 
 
 s 
 
 ^ w r- — . 
 
 ktliT¥4'lkJ^
 
 BOOK OF THE DEAD — CHAPTER LXXXIX. 05 
 
 " him enter thy hand, Osiris, king, lord of the two 
 " lands, Men-Maat-Ea, whose word is madt, thou shalt 
 " not perish. Nut cometh unto thee, and she fashioneth 
 " thee as the Great Fashioner, and thou shalt never 
 " decay ; she fashioneth thee, she turneth thy weak- 
 "ness into strength, she gathereth together thy 
 " meml:)ers, she hringeth thy heart into thy body, and 
 " she liath placed thee at the head of the living doubles 
 " {kau), () Osiris, king, lord of the two lands, Men- 
 " Maat-Ra, whose word is madt, before the beautiful 
 " god, the lord of Ta-Tghesekt." 
 
 IX. Saith Osiris, the king, the lord of the two 
 lands, Men-Maat-Ra, whose word is madt, the son of 
 the Sun, [proceeding] from his body, loving him, the 
 lord of diadems, Seti Meij-en-1'tah, whose word is viadt, 
 
 [The Chapter of Causing the Soul to be United 
 TO ITS Body in the Undekwokld] ^ 
 
 " Hail, ye gods who bring (Anniu) ! [Hail] ye gods 
 " who run (Pehiu) ! [Hail] thou who dwellest in 
 " his embrace, thou great god, grant thou that may 
 " come unto me my soul from wheresoever it may be. 
 " If it would delay, then let my soul be brought unto 
 " me from wheresoever it may be, for thou shalt find 
 " the Eye of Horus standing by thee like tliose 
 " watchful gods. If it lie down, let it lie down in 
 "Annu (Heliopolis), the land where [souls are joined 
 " to their bodies] in thousands. Let my soul be brought 
 
 ' This is Chaiitor LXXXIX. of the Book of the Dead. 
 VOL. II. F
 
 66 THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI I 
 
 K\:r\ 
 
 W 
 
 \\ 
 
 ^=5 
 
 i=^ I 
 
 
 PI fe\^ III 
 
 
 ^ I 
 
 III 
 
 IfilVI^ 
 
 D 
 
 Ail. iirzg^'^^ /i\ 
 
 § will ^-^^ «^=: 
 
 A. 
 
 Ill 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^x\ (^ t | n AAAAA^ 
 
 m 
 
 D 
 
 I I I I ^ w 
 
 
 N\N\N\ I I I -/J 
 
 m ^D? 
 
 
 
 Ql 
 
 -<2::^ 
 
 ^,- 
 
 -<S=^ f
 
 BOOK OF THE DEAD — CHAPTER LXXXIX. 67 
 
 "unto me from wheresoever it ma}- be. Make thou 
 "strong, O guardian of sky and earth, this my soul. 
 "If it Nvouhl tarry, do thou cause the soul to see its 
 " )>oily, and thou slialt find the Eye of Horus standing 
 " by thee even as do those [gods who watch]." 
 
 " Hail, ye gods who tow along the l>oat of the lord of 
 " millions of years, who bring [it] into the upper regions 
 " of the Tuat, who make it to pass over Nut, and who 
 " make the soul to enter into its sdhu (i.e., spiritual body), 
 "let your hands be full of weapons, and grasp them 
 " and make them sharp, and hold chains in readmess to 
 " destroy the serpent enemy. Let the l>oat rejoice, and 
 "let the great god pass on in i)eace, and Ijehold, grant 
 "ye that the soul of Osiris, king Men-Maat-Ea, whose 
 " word is madt, may emerge from the thighs [of Nut] in 
 " the eastern horizon of heaven, for ever and for ever." 
 
 X. Osiris, the king, the lord of the two lands, Men- 
 Maat-Ra Setep-[en]-Ra, whose word is viadt, the son 
 of Ra, loving rTAH-SEKiti, the lord of diadems, Seti 
 ]\lEi{-EN-PTAn, whose word is vi((dt, saith : — " ye 
 " aheiinu beings, go ye roinid behind me, and let not 
 "these my members be witliout strength." 
 
 XI. Osiris, the king, the lord of the two lands, Men- 
 ]\lAAT-liA Aa-Ra, whose word is madt, the son of the 
 sun, [proceeding] from his body, loving him, lord of 
 diadems, Seti Mei;-kn-1'taij, saith : — " Nut, lift tbou 
 " me up. I am lliy son. I )o away from me that which 
 " maketii me to be without motion." [Nut saith] : — 
 "O (Jsiris, the king, the lord of the two lands, Men-
 
 68 THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI I. 
 
 Cai] y ¥ g^ ¥ fe^ C SIM3 1 
 
 
 (SllMZls 
 
 a (2 
 
 Ql
 
 PRAYERS OF SETI T. 6g 
 
 " ^MaaT-IIa .\a-1iA, wluKse word is ntaaf, (ho son of 
 "the sun, [jtrocecdiiiul I'loiii liis IhmIv, Iunjul!, him, 
 "the hiid of (liadoins, Si>:ti AfEi;-KN-l'TAn, whoso 
 "word is iiiadf, 1 liavo given thee tliy head to be 
 " on thy body, and all the members of him that is 
 " Seti Mek-ex-Ptah, wliose word is mr«7t, sliall never 
 " lack strength." 
 
 On the outside of tlie cover, beneath the two scenes 
 and texts which occupied tlie upper part of it, was a 
 liorizontal line of hieroglyphics which contained two 
 short speeches, the one l>y the goddess Nut, and the 
 other by Thoth. The speech of Nut is a duplicate 
 of the opening lines of that found on the bottom 
 of the sarcophagus (see above § v., p. 55); the 
 speech of Thoth is much mutilated, and can have 
 contained little except the promise to be with the 
 king, and a repetition of the royal name and titles. 
 On the inside of the cover were texts, many por- 
 tions of wliich are identical, as we see from the 
 fragments which remain, with tlie Chapters from the 
 Boole of tlie Dead which are found on the Ijottom of tlie 
 sarcophagus, and which have been transcribed above. 
 At each side of the figure of the winged goddess which 
 was cut on the breast was a figure of the god Tlioth, 
 who is seen holding a staff surmounted by the 
 symbol of "night," ^^f^. AVheii the cover was com- 
 plete there were probably four such figures upon it, 
 and the texts which accompanied them were, no doubt,
 
 70 THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI I. 
 
 identical witli those fduml in ('li;i])tci' (T.XI. of the 
 Ihiuk of thr Dead. 
 
 Tiie scenes and inscriptions which cover tlie inside 
 and outside of the sarcophagus are described and 
 transcribed in tlie following chapters.
 
 ( 71 ) 
 
 APPENDIX TO CHAPTER I. 
 
 BELZONI'S ACCOUNT OF HIS DISCOVERY OF 
 THE TOMB OF SETI I. 
 
 " On the 16th (of October) I recommenced my cxcava- 
 " tions in the Valley of Beban el jMalook, and pointed 
 " out the fortunate spot, which has paid me for all the 
 " trouble I took in my researches. I may call this a 
 " fortunate day, one of the best perhaps of my life ; 
 " I do not mean to say, that fortune has made me rich, 
 " for I do not consider all rich men fortunate ; but she 
 " has given me that satisfaction, that extreme pleasure, 
 " which wealth cannot purchase : the pleasure of 
 " discovering what has been long sought in vain, and 
 " of presenting the world with a new and perfect 
 " monument of Egyptian anticpiity, which can be 
 "recorded as superior to any other in })()int of 
 "grandeur, style, and preservation, appearing as if just 
 " finished on the day we entered it ; and what I found 
 "in it will show its great superiority to all others. 
 " Not fifteen yards from the last tomb I described, I 
 " caused the earth to be opened at the foot of a steep 
 " hill, and under a torrent, which, when it rains, pours 
 " a gi-eat quantity of water over the very spot I have
 
 72 THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI I. 
 
 "caused to be dug. Xo one could imagine, that the 
 " ancient Egyptians would make the entrance into 
 " such an immense and superb excavation just imder a 
 " torrent of water ; l)ut I had strong reasons to suppose, 
 " that tliere was a tomb in that place, from indications 
 " I had observed in my pursuit. The Fellahs who 
 " were accustomed to dig were all of opinion, that 
 "there was nothing in that spot, as the situation of 
 " this tomb dittered from that of any other. I con- 
 " tinned the work, however, and the next day, the 
 " 17th, in the evening we perceived the part of the 
 " rock that was cut, and formed the entrance. On the 
 " 18th, early in the morning, the task was resumed, 
 "and about noon the workmen reached the entrance, 
 " which was eighteen feet below the surface of the 
 "ground. The appearance indicated, that the tomb 
 " was of tlie first rate ; but still I did not expect to 
 " find such a one as it really proved to be. The Fellahs 
 " ad\'anced till they saw that it was probably a large 
 " tomb, when they protested they could go no further, 
 " the tomb was so much choked up with large stones, 
 "which tliey could not get out of the passage. I 
 " descended, examined the i)lace, pointetl out to them 
 " where they might dig, and in an hour there was 
 " room enough for me to enter through a passage that 
 " the earth had left under the ceiling of the first 
 " corridor, which is ?t(j ft. 2 in. long, and 8 ft. 8 in. wide, 
 " and, when cleared of the ruins, G ft. 9 in. high, 
 " I perceived immediately by the painting on the
 
 BELZONI'S NARRATIVE OF ITS DISCOVERY J^ 
 
 "ceiling, and by the liicioglyphics in Imsso relievo, 
 "which were to be seen wlieio (he earth (hd not rcacli, 
 "that this was the entrance intn a hirg€ and niagniti- 
 "cent tomb. At the ew\ of this corridor I came to a 
 " staircase 23 ft. long, and of the same l)readth as the 
 "corridor. The door at the bottom is 12ft. high. 
 " From the foot of the staircase I entered another 
 " corridor, 37 ft. 3 in. long, and of the same width and 
 " height as the other, each side sculptured with 
 " hieroglyphics in hasso relievo, and painted. The 
 " ceiling also is finely painted, and in pretty good 
 " preservation. The more I saw, the more I was eager 
 " to see, such being the nature of man ; but I was 
 " checked in my anxiety at tliis time, for at the end of 
 " this passage I reached a large pit, wliich intercepted 
 " my progress. This pit is 30 ft. deep, and 14 ft. by 
 "12 ft. 3 in. wide. The upper part of the pit is 
 " adorned with figures, from the wall of the passage 
 " up to the ceiling. The passages from the entrance 
 " all the way to this pit have an inclination downward 
 " of an angle of eighteen degrees. On the opposite side 
 " of the pit facing the entrance I perceived a small 
 " aperture 2 ft. wide and 2 ft. 6 in. high, and at the 
 " bottom of the wall a quantity of rubbish. A rope 
 " fastened to a })iece of wood, that was laid across the 
 " passage against the projections wliich formed a kind 
 " of door, appears to have been used by the ancients 
 " for descending into the pit ; and from the small 
 " aperture on the opposite side hung another, which
 
 74 THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI I. 
 
 "reached the Ix it torn, no douljt lor the purpose of 
 " ascending. AVe eonld clearly perceive, that the water 
 " wliich entered the ])assages from the torrents of rain 
 " ran into this pit, and tlie wood and rope fastened to 
 " it crumbled to dust on touching them. At the 
 " bottom of the pit were several pieces of wood, placed 
 " against the side of it, so as to assist the person who 
 " was to ascend by the rope into the aperture.* I saw 
 " the impossibility of proceeding at the moment. Mr. 
 " Beechey, who that day came from Luxor, entered the 
 " tomb, but was also disappointed. 
 
 " The next day, the 19th, by means of a long beam 
 " we succeeded in sending a man u}) into the aperture, 
 " and having contrived to make a bridge of two beams, 
 " we crossed the pit. The little aperture we found to 
 " be an ojjening forced through a wall, that had 
 " entirely closed the entrance, which was as large as 
 " the corridor. The Egyptians had closely shut it up, 
 " })lastered tlie wall over, and painted it like the rest 
 " of the sides of the pit, so that but for the aperture, 
 " it would have been impossible to suppose, that there 
 "was any further jiroceeding; and anyone would 
 " conclude, that the tomb ended with the pit. The 
 " rope in the inside of the wall did not fall to dust, but 
 " remained pretty strong, the water not having reached 
 "it at all; and the wood to whic-h it was attached was 
 " in good preservation. It was owing to this method 
 "of keeping the damp out of the inner parts of the 
 " tomlj, that they are so well preserved. I observed
 
 p.elzoni'r nakrative of its discovekv 75 
 
 ".some cavities at the Ituttnni ol" the well, Init found 
 " nothiniTj in thciii, nor any eoiniiuiiiication I'rctiii the 
 "Itottom to any other ])lace ; therefore we eouM not 
 "doulit their being made to receive the waters from 
 " the rain, which happens occasionally in this moun- 
 " tain. The valley is so much raised by the rubbish, 
 " which the water carries down from the upper parts, 
 " that the entrance into these tombs is become much 
 " lower than the torrents ; in consequence, the water 
 " finds its way into the tombs, some of which are 
 " entirely choked up with earth. 
 
 " When we had passed through the little aperture 
 " we found ourselves in a beautiful hall, 27 ft. 6 in. by 
 " 25 ft. 10 in., in which were four pillars 3 ft. square. 
 " I shall not give any description of the painting, till I 
 " have described the whole of the chambers. At the 
 " end of this room, which I call the entrance-hall, and 
 " opposite the aperture, is a large door, from which 
 " three steps lead down into a chamber witli two 
 " pillars. This is 28 ft. 2 in. ])y 25 ft. G in. The pillars 
 " are 3 ft. 10 in. square. I gave it the name of the 
 " drawing-room ; for it is covered with figures, which, 
 " though only outlined, are so fine and perfect, that 
 " you would think they had lieen drawn only the day 
 " before. Returning into the entrance-hall, we saw 
 " on the left of the aperture a large staircase, which 
 "descended into a corridor. It is 13ft. 4 in. long, 
 " 7 ft. 6 in. wide, and has 18 steps. At the bottom we 
 " entered a beautiful corridor, 36 ft. Gin. by Gft. 11 in.
 
 76 THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI I. 
 
 " AVo jM'i'crived that the ])ainlin,us hecaiuo im>iv jicrlVet 
 "as we ad\-aiiced farther iutn the iiiterinr. Tlicy 
 "retained their ^loss, or a kind of varnish over the 
 "colours, which had a beautiful eftect. The figures are 
 "painted on a white ground. At the end of this 
 "corridor we descended ten steps, wliich I call the 
 "small stairs, into another, 17 ft. 2 in. hy 10 ft. Sin. 
 " From this we entered a small chamber, 20 ft. 4 in. by 
 " 13 ft. 8 in., to which I gave the name of the Room of 
 " Beauties ; for it is adorned with the most beautiful 
 " figures in hasso relievo, like all the rest, and painted. 
 " When standing in the centre of this chamber, the 
 " traveller is surrounded by an assembly of Egyptian 
 " gods and goddesses. Proceeding farther, we entered 
 "a large hall, 27 ft. Din. by 26 ft. 10 in. In this hall 
 "are two rows of square pillars, three on each side of 
 " the entrance, forming a line with the corridors. At 
 " each side of this hall is a small chamber ; that on the 
 "right is 10 ft. 5 in. by 8 ft. 8 in., that on the left 
 "10 ft. 5 in. by 8 ft. 9^ in. This hall I termed the 
 " Hall of Pillars ; the little room on the right, Isis' 
 " Room, as in it a large cow is ]»ainted, of which I 
 "shall gi\'e a description hereafter; that on the left, 
 " the Room of Mysteries, from the mysterious figures 
 " it exhibits. At the (^id of this hall we entered a 
 "large saloon, with an arched roof or ceiling, which is 
 "separated from the Hall of Pillars only by a step 
 "so that the two may be reckoned one. The saloon 
 "is 81 ft. 10 in. by 27ft. On the right is a small
 
 BELZONI S NARRATIVE OF ITS DISCOVERY ^"J 
 
 "chamber without anything in it, roughly cut, as if 
 " unfinished, and without ])ainting ; on the left we 
 " entered a chamber with two S(|uare piUars, 25 ft. 8 in. 
 "by 22ft. 10 in. This I called the Sideboard Room, 
 " as it has a j)rojection of 3 ft. in form of a sideboard 
 " all round, ^^•hich was perhaps intended to contain the 
 " articles necessary for the funeral ceremony. The 
 "pillars are oft. 4 in. s(|uare, and the whole beautifully 
 " painted as tlie rest. At the same end of the room, 
 "and facing the Hall of Pillars, we entered liy a large 
 "door into another ehambcr with four pillars, one of 
 " which is fallen down. This chamber is 43 ft. 4 in. by 
 "17 ft. 6 in. ; the pillars 3 ft. 7 in. scj^uare. It is covered 
 " with white plaster, where the rock did not cut 
 " smoothly, but there is no painting on it. I named it 
 " the Bull's, or Apis' Room, as we found the carcass 
 " of a bull in it, embalmed with asphaltum ; and also, 
 " scattered in various places, an immense (|uantity of 
 " small wooden figures of mummies 6 or 8 in. long, 
 "and covered with asphaltum to preserve them. 
 "There were some other figures of fine earth baked, 
 " coloured blue, and strongly varnished. On each side 
 " of the two little rooms were wooden statues standing 
 " erect, 4 ft. high, with a circular hollow inside, as if to 
 "contain a roll of papyrus, which I have no doubt 
 " they did. AVe found likewise fragments of other 
 " statues of wood and of composition. 
 
 " But the description of what we found in the centre 
 " of the saloon, and which I have reserved till this place,
 
 78 THE SARCOPHAGUS OF SETI I. 
 
 " merits the most particular attention, not having its 
 " equal in the world, and being such as we had no idea 
 " could exist. It is a sarcophagus of the finest oriental 
 " alabaster, 9 ft. 5 in. long, and 3 ft. 7 in. wide. Its 
 " thickness is only 2 in., and it is transparent, when a 
 " light is i)laced in the inside of it. It is minutely 
 " sculptured within and without with several hundred 
 " figures, which do not exceed 2 in. in height, and 
 "represent, as I suppose, the whole of the funeral 
 "procession and ceremonies relating to the deceased, 
 " luiited with several emblems, &c. I cannot give an 
 " adequate idea of this beautiful and iuMiluable piece 
 " of antiquity, and can only say, that nothing has been 
 " brought into Europe from Egypt that can l)e coni- 
 " pared with it. Tlie cover was not there; it had been 
 " taken out, and Ijroken into several pieces, which we 
 " found in digging before the first entrance. The 
 " sarcophagus was over a staircase in tlie centre ol the 
 "saloon, which communicated with a subterraneous 
 " passage, leading downwards, 300 ft. in length. At the 
 " end of this passage we found a great quantity of bats' 
 " dung, which choked it up, so that we could go no 
 " farther without digging. It was nearly filled up too 
 " by the falling in of the u])per ])art. One liundred feet 
 " from the entrance is a staircase; in good preservation ; 
 " liut tlic rock l)elow changes its sul)stance, from a beau- 
 "lif\il snlid calcarcMMis stone, l)CComing a, kind of bhick 
 " rotten slate, wliich crumbles into chist only Ijy touching. 
 '•This subterraneous passage proceeds in a soutli-west
 
 BENZONI S NARRATIVE OF ITS DISCOVERY 79 
 
 "direction througli the mountain. I measured the 
 " distance from the entrance, and also the rocks above, 
 "and found that the passage reaches nearly lialfway 
 " through the mountain to the upper part of the valley. 
 " I have reasons to suppose, that this passage was used 
 " to come into the toml) l)y another entrance ; l)ut this 
 "could not be after the death of the person who was 
 " l)uried there, for at the bottom of the stairs just 
 " under the sarcophagus a wall was built, which 
 " entirely closed the connnunication between the toml) 
 " and the subterraneous passage. Some large blocks of 
 " stone were placed under the sarcophagus horizontally, 
 " level with the pavement of the saloon, that no one 
 " might percei\'e any stairs or subterranean passage 
 " was there. The doorway of the sideboard room had 
 " been walled up, and forced open, as we found the 
 " stones with which it was shut, and the mortar in the 
 "jambs. The staircase of the entrance-hall had been 
 " walled up also at the bottom, and the space filled 
 " with rul)bish, and the floor covered with large blocks 
 " of stone, so as to deceive any one who should force 
 " the fallen wall near the pit, and make him suppose, 
 " that the tomb ended with the entrance-hall and the 
 " drawing-room. I am inclined to believe, that who- 
 " ever forced all these passages must have had some 
 "spies with them, who were well acquainted with the 
 "tomb throughout. The tomb faces the north-east, 
 "and the direction of the wliole runs straight soulli- 
 " west."
 
 ( 8o ) 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 THE ANTE-CHAMBER OF THE TUAT. 
 
 In tlie Fn;.ST Division of ilie "UiM.k of (4ates of the 
 Tuat," aec'onliiiy; tn the saicojtliaguw of Seti I., we see 
 I lie lioi'izoii (if the west, or the mountain of the west, 
 C:=£l , divided into two parts, Q= d2 , and the boat of the 
 sun is supposed to sail between tliem, and to enter by 
 this passage into the Tuat. On the right hand is fixed 
 a jackal -headed standard, and on each side of it kneels 
 
 a bearded god; one god is called 'Pat, 
 
 and is a personification of the region wliich is lieyond 
 
 the day, and the other 8et, ^ , and represents the 
 
 funeral mountain. On the left hand is a ram-headed 
 standard, and on each side of it also kneels a bearded 
 god ; as before, one is called Tat and the other Set. 
 The ram's liead has the liori/oiital, wavy horns, wiiicli 
 belong to the particular species of ram that was the 
 symbol of the god Khnenni ; this animal disappeared 
 from Egypt l)efore tlie Xllth Dynasty, but the tradition 
 of him rcmaincil. In the iiiiddh; f»f the scene sails the 
 boat of the sun. '\'\\v god is s} inbolized by a beetle 
 within a disk, which is cn\clopcd in the folds of a
 
 IS 
 
 n 
 
 f 
 
 w 
 
 I 
 
 {-Si 
 
 U 
 
 
 :«c 
 
 Vvil.lU-lllJ, 
 
 ra(- 
 
 i«l:i5il!f-|ll 
 
 "■^^Ia ^^ 
 
 VOL. II. 
 

 
 82 
 
 THE ANTE-CHAMBER OF THE TUAT 
 
 serpeiil lia\ iug its iail in ils iiiouLh. lii the bows 
 stands the ,uod of divine intelligence, whose name is 
 Sa, ^^, and ill Iho sl(>rii, near the twn ])addles, stands 
 
 Heka, Jj, i.e., Iht; persoiiificatiou of the word of 
 
 power, or of magical utterance. The go<l wlio nsuall}' 
 accompanies Sa is Hr. The text which refers to the 
 Sun -god reads : — 
 
 fl O 
 
 
 D O 
 
 — H A^^W\A 
 
 qi 
 
 I I I /VWV\^ 
 
 =^-:\i\^\ 
 
 AAA/W\ 
 
 I I I 
 
 -M AA/NAAA /Vn/VW\ 
 
 /\A/VV\A / I AAAAAA 
 
 I D O I I I ^ ^ ^ 
 
 /v^vvJa I I I I I r/vj-rj- A -y- I II AA/V\AA I i ' " ^ i di 
 
 (IQ-Q. 
 
 A/V\AAA <C_-> 
 
 I I I rwvvs/\ 
 
 11 
 
 ■*fv 
 
 J I ^ _Zr /wwv^ _M^ GE^ I A 
 
 ^ I I r 
 
 " Efi saith unto the Alountain : — Send forth liglit, O 
 " Mountain ! Let radiance arise from tliat wliich liath 
 "devoured me, and which hath slain men and is Idled 
 "with the slaughter of the gods. Uri^ith to you, 
 " yc who dwell ill tlic liglit in your lialiitatioiis, my
 
 
 
 
 
 DliM-C^il^fjiflttf^ 
 
 ;:y:^
 
 84 
 
 THE ANTE-CHAMBER HE THE TUAT 
 
 " spleiulouvs shall be to y(ju. I have decreed their 
 "slaugliter, and they have slaup^htered everythin<i; 
 "which existeth. 1 haw^ liidden }'()U from those who 
 " are upon the earth, restoring the crown (or, tiara) to 
 " those who are on the Mountain. The gods say : — 
 '"Let this jackal -headed sceptre H j emit the words 
 
 " of this great god who joineth together his members. 
 " Come then unto us, thou from whom we have come 
 " forth ! Cries of joy are to thee, thou who art in 
 " thy disk, thou great god whose forms (or transforma- 
 " tions) are manifold.' Their provisions [consist] of 
 " bread-cakes and beer." 
 
 The paragraph below the abo\e text is practically a 
 duplicate of it, but it contains no mention of either the 
 jackal-headed or the ram-headed sceptre, and it is 
 unnecessary to give it here. 
 
 On the right of the boat stand twelve gods, who are 
 
 called "gods of the mountain," \\\ J] i "^ , 
 the text referring to them reads : — 
 
 [~] /VV\AAA 
 
 aiul 
 
 ^ I 
 
 | f;iiiiiii tt 
 
 
 I i_J A^yWV\ — . (J I 

 
 THE TWENTY-FOUR GODS OF SET-AMKNTKT 85 
 
 " [These gods] have come into being from Ka, and 
 " from his substance, and have emerged from his eye. 
 " He hath decreed for them [as] a place (or, abode) the 
 " Hidden Mountain (AmetU Set), which consumeth men, 
 "and gods, and all cattle, and all reptiles wliich are 
 " created by this great god. This great god hath decreed 
 " the plans (or, designs) thereof having made [them] to 
 " spring up in the earth which he created." 
 
 On the left of the boat stand twelve gods, who are 
 
 called "gods of Set-Amentet," | | | r?) ' ^^^ (J ^^> 
 and the text refcrrhig to them reads : — 
 
 ij i ^ 1j £=3^^^ I I I s=j ^ n 1 I I I Jl 
 
 I I I I 
 
 - — fl2=c5 
 
 
 " The hidden place. [These are] those who have 
 " consumed the men, and the gods, and all the cattle, 
 " and all the reptiles which this great god hath created. 
 " This great god hath decreed plans for them after 
 " he made them to spring up in the land wliieh he 
 " created, that is to say, in the Amentet wliich he 
 " made."
 
 ( 86 ) 
 
 CHAPTEE III. 
 THE GATE OF SAA-SET. 
 
 The SEco^'D Division of the Tuat. 
 
 The Loat of Ea, liaviiig passed between the two 
 halves of the horizou of the West, now approaches a 
 gateway, the door of which is closed before him ; the 
 door of the second division of the Tuat is different 
 from the doors of the other di\-isions, for it consists of 
 a single leaf which turns upon a pivot working in 
 holes in the top and bottom of the framework of the 
 door. This door is guarded by a serpent called SxVA- 
 
 Set, ^^ ^^j^ ^ I , which stands upon its tail. The 
 
 text referring to this serpent reads : — 
 
 ^ ^ I imimi A/ww\ imimi /www .-^^ _^^ ^ jt^ ■t— c C:£^ 
 ^ V ^ — " — i iii i ii!! /ww\A jN ^ Q r\ i""""" i a 
 
 O I AA/VvV, 
 
 
 iiiiiiiii 
 
 I I I 
 
 ' ^ Z 7i 
 
 — " — iiiiimi 1 
 
 I ^r^^^ 
 
 iiiiimi 
 
 AA/WV\
 
 THE GATE OF SAA-SET 
 
 "He who is over (i.e., lias llic 
 "mastery over) this door opeiieth to 
 " Ri. Sa saith unto Sat-Set, ' Open 
 " thy door to Ra, throw wide t»peii thy 
 " door to Khuti. The hidden abode is 
 " in darkness, so that the transforma- 
 "tions of this god may take place.' 
 "This portal is closed after this god 
 " hath entered in through it, and there 
 " is lamentation on the part of those 
 "who are in their momitain when 
 " they hear this dcjor shut." 
 
 In the centre of the scene we see 
 the hoat of Ra heing towed along hy 
 four gods standing, each of whom 
 grasps the tow-line with Ijoth hands. 
 The god is now in the form of a ram- 
 headed man, who holds the sceptre 
 
 1 in his right hand, and has the solar 
 
 disk above his horns. He stands 
 within a shrine which is enveloped in 
 the voluminous folds of the serpent 
 
 Mehen, °^; a serpent also stands on 
 
 his tail before him. In frtmt of the 
 shrine stands Sa, and behind it Hekau. 
 The ''ods who tow the boat are called 
 
 87 
 
 (3m 
 
 TUAIU, ^^ICTD^I. 
 
 i2u 
 
 %l 
 
 'Si\ 
 
 -/^
 
 88 
 
 SECOND DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 The Sim's boat is met iu this section by a company 
 of thirteen gods, who are under the direction of a god 
 who holds a staff in his hand. The names of the first 
 
 seven gods are:— Nepemeh, □ ,^ NexiiA, '^,2 Ba, 
 Q, Heku, ^^, r.EHA-AB, ^^"O"? Khnemu, Q, and 
 
 Setchet, 1 ^°^ ; the tliird has tlie head of a ram, an<I 
 the fourth that of a liawk. The last six uods 
 
 -'2;»V^>'' 
 
 
 ^sw^lip 1 
 
 _^, _, _ . jy ""^r- ^^ .tss^ <^ 
 
 The Bout (if the Sun tuwcd by Gods of the Tuat. 
 
 are described as "gods who ;iit' in llie entrances," 
 
 has no uanic. Tlic tcxl which vi'tVrs lo tlic Sun-god 
 reads : — 
 
 N^^^V1l:^k 
 
 
 ' Viir., Nki'KN, Q Q . ' Viii., Xkna, /wwv\^
 
 THE GATE OF SAA-SET 
 
 89 
 
 0^ 
 
 
 Seven of the Gods of the Kntrances who tow the Soat of the Sun through 
 Saa-Set. 
 
 ff jlJl.n-JL- '"'118 ^^|,iii 
 
 ir ^ fi ! -irS VI ^ P^J :^ tT ^ 
 
 Six of the Gods of the Kntrances wlio tow the Boat of tlie Sun tliroueh 
 Saa-Sct, and a god who bears a !«taff.
 
 go SECOND DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 — A^Sf liiicr:zi^ 
 
 rj AAAA/V\ ^K\ ^ 
 
 1 <^^^ .~~^ inn ^ -<2=^ 
 
 
 (5 ^ Q <rr 
 cm] ^ 
 
 |i 
 
 1^ 
 I I 
 
 ^1-* 
 
 l" I I I 
 
 <C5N.. 
 
 
 ^n^'^^vr^ 
 
 (2 I I I 9 ^^ 
 
 Jn AA^^A^ — h — n i 
 
 Qp! 
 
 I I I 
 
 -<2>- 
 
 AA/W^ rt 
 
 [~i^] n I 
 
 I M I 
 
 '^'^'^'^'^ A^\AAA 
 
 e I I I M I 
 
 A^^>/VNA 
 
 PI 
 
 2±2 
 
 e I I I 
 
 A^^\AAA 
 AAA/SAA 
 
 - Q 
 
 iCi AAA/W\ /T\ 
 I I I I I ^ 
 
 I I I 
 
 ?Q I 
 
 1=311 ^ ci 
 
 n ' 1 wi 
 
 * I III A^AA^\ AAAA/SA I 
 
 III ci I LTUTiininr ! JJ 
 
 I HI X t ^ I / A /ww^ 
 
 III U X »^ hl\N\N\ 
 
 '^ I 1 I IV I ^'^'^^ I 
 
 I I I I fl 
 
 "Tills uR'ut "'Oil iuiiiiicNctii almiu the loail.s ul" the
 
 SPEECH UF RA TO THE GODS OF SAA-SET QI 
 
 "Tuat. This god is drawn by the gods of the Tuat 
 " in order to make divisions (or, distinctions) in the 
 "earth, and to work out [his] designs therein, to weigh 
 " words and deeds in Anient, to magnify the great god 
 " above the little god among the gods who are in the 
 "Tuat, to place the Knu (i.e., the blessed dead) upon 
 " their thrones, and the damned [in the place] to which 
 " they have been condenuied in the judgment, and to 
 " destroy their bodies by an evil death. Ra saith : — ' 
 "grant ye to me that I may restore the tiara, and tliat 
 " I may have jxtsscssion of [my] shrine which is in the 
 " earth. Let Sa and Heka unite themselves to me for 
 " the working out of plans for you, and for making to 
 " come into being their attributes (or, forms) ye [have] 
 "what is yours. Isis hath made to be at i)eace the 
 " wind, and offerings are there. None shutteth [the 
 " door] against you, and the damned do not enter in 
 " after you. That which belongeth to you is to you, 
 "gods.' These gods say imto Ra, 'There is darkness 
 "on the road of the Tuat, therefore let the doors 
 " which are closed be unfolded, let the earth open, 
 "so that the gods may draw along him that hath 
 "created them.' Their food [i.e., the food of these 
 " gods] is of the funeral oft'erings, and their drink 
 " is from their cool waters, and their hands are 
 "on meat olVcriuus among the Akert regions of 
 " Anient." 
 
 On the right ol' ihc boat arc lwi-iily-l'o\u' gods, 
 the lirst twelve of wliom are described as "those
 
 92 
 
 SECOND DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 who are at peace, the worshippers of Ea," 
 
 •jlc ^K\ ^ J 3Q , and the second twelve as " the righteous 
 
 ^ 
 
 who are in the Tuat," ^ ^ ^ ' ^ " " ^ ^ 
 
 These beings are thus described by the accompanying 
 text : — 
 
 ^ 
 
 O® 
 
 S w/wv Jl I A(^ III I I ID D 
 
 ^^ 
 
 1>\ 
 
 >AAAA 
 
 I I I 
 
 ' ^^WW\ I 
 
 AAAAAA AA/W\A 
 
 ^ ci 
 
 I I \7 A/'/>/v/V\ \X\ ill Wn. 
 
 I I 1 II -B^ \l Jl 
 
 I I I I D I 
 
 D JT 111 
 
 1 ^/ww\ 
 
 II I I 
 
 tk<^ 
 
 I 1 I 
 
 
 
 I I I I I I 
 
 cmi -^^ 
 
 I I I 
 AAAAAA 
 
 I I I 
 
 w 
 
 
 O I ^ I I I ^ D -ZI 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 AA/VW\ AAAAAA 
 
 tl^lrriki 
 
 z^^^^ ^ lllllllll 
 
 z^^^M.11 1 I 
 
 UiW 
 
 u u 
 
 mh 
 
 @ 
 
 _ 3fcT:^ I I |<:z=> 
 
 ^'<^ 
 
 iVIP^lS^I^fPi^SPi: 
 
 oa I 
 
 1 sl 
 
 H I
 
 TWENTY-FOUR RIGHTEOUS GODS OF SAA-SET 93 
 
 fiiy>?U ..^^(sSII^^-i^M'Sls: 
 
 (f^i V rr^ Li_i )^ • I ^^^^ :^;^ •■■^ "■^^*" ■"■ ^ "^r** 
 
 £3 • ■ JP^ ^ -^M /vvwvv; ■ rr^^' ; '^^oT 1^=^ 
 
 
 AV^VA'-A 
 
 -AvA'A-A-A 
 
 Nine of the gods wli 
 
 adore Ra and are at peace. 
 
 ^ , •: \ m^-r^r:-^. i\- ^ i^^^Ji 
 
 •%*.%• •'•,•♦• -'•,'••• • » •, • 
 
 
 — <— •'-^V "V ' • ' • -■ w M- i«VW\ I I I <SS» ■ w 
 
 ^ rnj v£, ,~ LAJ 'jj ,'vv.vvvv ^ ■ 2-x: m I J ;:::::: 
 
 eTin ^ :J|, ^ — . ^1^ ^ .. ^z.^ ^ .^, ^.^ 
 
 y 
 
 Five of the righteous gods of 
 the Tuat. 
 
 Three of the gods who adore 
 Ra and are at peace.
 
 94 
 
 SFXOND DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 1 iT 
 
 I I ^ 111 
 
 AWAA i-\ 'W^^/V^ AA/WV\ 
 
 f 
 
 AAAAAA AAA/VSA 
 
 ^ I 1 I I I 11 I I -^ 
 
 
 .^.^ 
 
 AA/^A\ 1 I I A.^W^A 
 
 X ^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ w 
 
 n ^ 
 
 to-: 
 
 ft 
 
 u 
 
 -H — rrj 
 
 ci D dl <=> ^ O "^"^^ 
 
 " Tliese [are they who] have worshipped (or, praised) 
 " Ea upon earth, who uttered words of power against 
 " Apep, who made their offerings' unto him, and who 
 " burnt (literally, made) incense to their gods on their 
 " own Ijehalf, after their offerings. They liave gained 
 " jDOssession of their cool waters, and they receive their 
 " meat, and they eat of their offerings in the gateway 
 "of liini wliose name is hidden. Their meat is by the 
 " gateway, and their offerings are with him who is 
 " therein. And Ra saith unto them : — ' Your offermgs 
 " are yours, ye have power over your cool waters, your 
 "souls shall never be hacked to pieces, your meat 
 "shall never fail, [0 ye who have] praised [me], and 
 " have vanquished Apep for me.' " 
 
 The a])ove passage refers to the " worshippers of Ra 
 who are at peace," 
 
 " [These are] they [who] spake trutli u]ion earth,
 
 SPEECHES OF RA AND THE HODS 95 
 
 "and ulio \\v\v iiol .ulilicLtMl lo e\il tliuughl about tlie 
 " gods. They mako their invocations in this gateway, 
 " tliey live iqxtn maat (i.e., trutli), and their cool 
 " waters are in their cisterns. Efi saith unto tliem : — 
 "'Truth is yours, live ye <»n your food. Ye yourselves 
 " are trutli ; ' and they have power over these their cool 
 " waters, whicli are waters of fire to tliose wlio have 
 
 . ' ..♦.. ' ..... . . . . . ... » . -^: r-: . ,, . . 
 
 •***.* VI'.*' • * *.•.* *.*.'.'!',♦.•••'»♦♦' \. - ~ ',■'• I '..',''' ' •' • 
 
 •^^ I I I ' ' " ^-*^ «J^~w^ 0^ -[J ^;__. MWVWW l/WW\ •*-\l 
 
 I 
 
 Seven of the rifjliteous gods of the Tuat. 
 
 " guilt and sin. And these gods say to Ea : — ' Let 
 " there he stability to tlie Disk of Ea. Let him tiiat is 
 " in the shrine have the mastery over it, and let the 
 " serpent [Mehen] guard him well. May the flames of 
 "Khnti which are in the corners of the hidden shrine 
 "grow stronger,' And there shall be given to them 
 " meat in the place of peace in their circle."
 
 g6 SECOND DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 The above passage refers to the " I'ighteous who are 
 ill the Tiiat." 
 
 On the h'f i side ( if the 1 "oat uf Jla are : 1. The god Tem, 
 
 ^ wlio is depicted in tlie form of an aged man, 
 
 Njll IL 
 
 leaning heavily on a stick which lie grasps in his right 
 hand. 2. Four male beings who are lying prostrate on 
 their backs. ?>. Twenty male beings, with their Imcks 
 l)0wed, and their arms tied together at their ell)Ows 
 
 beliind their backs. The 
 fonr beings are de- 
 
 ^-^ S ^ "X-"^- ^ ^^ scriljed as "the inert," 
 
 jv I 'T^ i^Zm Zm^ZjJf^ tJie twenty as " the apos- 
 
 " tates of the Hall of Ea, 
 " who have ])lasphemed 
 " Rii n])on earth, who have 
 " invoked evils npon liim 
 '• tliat is in the Egg, who 
 
 ■ •■;. :•,•■■ ;:.'v.\'- ::.":. I-.;- " ]iave tlirust aside the 
 
 The inert Apostates and Blasphemers . , 
 
 ofRa. "right, and have spoken 
 
 O I 
 
 "words against KhT'TI," ~<^'^v i y^ 
 
 The text referring to tlie inert and tlio apostates 
 reads : —
 
 THE GATE OF SAA-SET 97 
 
 oTii [ 
 
 O 
 
 rv/ I ^2i 
 
 yWVAAA I 
 
 I I I (2 /wwv^C:^5lll ^ Jr III i<CZ> I I I _^S D 
 
 /wwv\ ..JU,.-^^ I ^wvaa'^^ ^ ^ tJ ^ ill'-' 
 
 iiinini ■ _fl I I I 
 
 ^ .^ I I cz^ "-^"^ 
 
 Ji f. ^ 5^ . 2 <=> I r\ rm I «l==_ 
 
 Y ^ ^^ 3 S^ = I * I c=^'A'^ <=> 
 
 s=> [^^ fV I ^ s= c=°>=3 s=> <=:> i "^3:^ n fk. ^^^^^ 
 
 11!^ Jl I !wiw! I I I I I II I I A/WWS I /WWVV 1 Jl 11 I 
 {WVWV A/^v/vV\ I I , W , AAAAAA V\ ^^^ I I .., A^^WV. ^*^ 
 
 LU iiiiliiiiii:^^Ji 1 ^^ I I I <=^ 
 
 4 =<^^ SiJ 21 <= Ml TT i III is=. Jf I S< I I 
 
 ^o ^-=- <^ I ° ^ ^^^ zi -t^ I I ^= ^^^^^ 
 
 [TZD ^ /i 1 I II X l' "==^ °^ ^ I I I I ^Jn=n: 
 
 " Tern worketh on behalf of Ra, glorifying the god, 
 
 VOL. IT. H 
 
 /WWNA 
 I I I
 
 g8 SECOND DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " and singing praises to liis soul, and dislriliuting evil 
 "tilings to his enemies. [He saith] : — 'Tiie word of 
 "my father lia is right (madt) against yon, and my 
 " word is right against yon. I am the son who }>ro- 
 "ceedeth from his father, and I am the father who 
 "proceedeth from his son. Ye are fettered, and ye 
 " are tied with strong cord, and it is I who have sent 
 "forth the decree concerning vou that ve should he 
 
 
 ^^ , ,««v« -, w-vw • • • — ■ . • . — ' •«=>• "■■- ."^r^ v( — ' \_L 
 
 Tlie Apostates and liliispliemers of Ra, who arc (loomed to destruction, with 
 their arms bound. 
 
 "hound in fetters; youi' arms shall ne\er more he 
 "opened. Ha ])ron()nn('eth the formula against yon, 
 " his soul is prepared to attack you ; my father hath 
 "gained the mastery over you, and his soul uttereth 
 " words against you. Your evil deeds [ha\'e turned] 
 "against yon, your ])lottings [have come] u])on you, 
 " your ahominahle acts [have recoiled] \\\)on you, your 
 "destinies are for evil, and your dcjoni hath heen
 
 RA S DECREE OE DOOM 
 
 99 
 
 "decreed before Ea; your unjust and perverted judg- 
 " ments are upon yourselves, and the wickedness of 
 " your words of cursing are upon you. E\'il is the doom 
 " wliicli hath l)een decreed for you before my father. 
 " It is you who have committed sins, and who have 
 "wrought iniipiity in the Great Hall; your corruptible 
 
 
 
 Sn * '^ e III <WW^ — »M— *WW "V =* 
 '' ^ V^^l ^ •> tvv»»rt IjT^ . . . 
 
 •_!_: ^- ^ ^ r^ t:; 2^ Sr^ 
 
 
 »^3f Pll 
 
 The Apostates and Bliispheiners of RS, who arc doomed to destruction, with 
 their arms bound. 
 
 " l)odies shall be cut in pieces, and your souls shall 
 " have no existence, and ye shall ne\'er again see Ra 
 " with his attril)utes [as] he journeyeth in the hidden 
 "land. Hail, Ha! Adored be Ra! Tiiino enemies are 
 "in tlie ])lace of destruction.'"
 
 ( 100 ) 
 
 CHArTEE lY. 
 
 THE GATE OF AQEBI. 
 
 The Tiiiijd Division of the Tuat. 
 
 The l3oat of the sun having passed tln-ough the Second 
 Division of the Tuat arrives at the gateway ^^hic'h 
 leads to the Third Division. This gateway is unlike 
 the first, which has already been described, for its 
 opening is protected l)y an outwork, similar to tliat 
 which protects the door of a fortified Iniilding. The 
 outwork is guarded by nine gods, in the form of 
 mummies, who are described as the " second company 
 
 of the gods," ^ 111 V , iiiid in this wall, which com- 
 o ' ^ 111 jk ^' 
 
 pletely divides the Second Di\isi(>n from the Third, 
 is an opening, whicli leads to a ccmidor that runs 
 between tw(i walls, tlio tojis of whicli are protected by 
 
 rows of poiiilod stakes, AAA AAA. At the entrance to 
 
 the corridor stands a god, in nmmmied form, called 
 
 Am-aua, ° ^;^ "^^ I , and at the exit is a similar 
 
 — m — n A /wwv\ ^ /wwvA 
 
 god called Sekhahesnefunen, I Y> ; 
 
 each is said to "extend his arms and hands to Ka," 
 
 I I AAAAftA, At each side of the angle, near 
 D X - QO il
 
 ^i2.tii:f34>iay3&i^>^4i 
 
 The Gate of the Serpent Aiiebi.
 
 102 
 
 THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 the t'liiraucc to the corridor, is a serpent, who ejects 
 Haines from liis mouth; the tiame from the one sweeps 
 al(»ii,i!,- the corrido]-, at the end of which it is met by 
 the llaiue from the other ser})ent which sw"ee})S along 
 the inside of the inner walL Tlie tiames of these 
 
 serpents are said to l)e for Ea, M ww\a ^ "Yha 
 
 gateway leading to the Third Division is called Septet- 
 UAUAU, I < — =-3 i iOtyIII,'' '^^^*^^ ^'^^^ ^^*^'*^*^" thereof, 
 whicli opens inwards, is guarded by the serpent standing 
 on his tail, who is called Aqebi, '^i^ '^ J HH '^^' ^^^^^ 
 faces outwards. The texts referring to the entrance of 
 Ila through this gateway read: — 
 
 -/i A/VWV\ 1 I <^ ^ I -Si) "^ AAA/V\A ( I «iJ '^ AAAWV\ I I 
 
 lllllllll 
 
 
 LJ AAA/Vv\ 
 
 <^ 
 
 D 
 
 — "- «^^" AA/V\/\A 
 
 ^•^ -^ A/W\AA 
 
 A/WSAA 
 
 "mmnr n -^ sQ I X 
 
 F^Y^ 11 
 
 AAAAAA I U 
 71 -rl lllllllll 
 
 ra mm 
 
 n n ^ <ci — >^ 
 
 1 ° 
 
 I AAAA 
 
 AA/W\A r] 
 
 AA/VW\ 
 
 iiiniiii /
 
 ra's address to the serpent aqebi 103 
 
 " [When] this god cometh to this gateway, to enter 
 " in through this^ gateway, the gods who are therein 
 " acclaim this great god, [saying], ' Let this gateway be 
 " unfokled t(.) Khuti, and let the doors be opened to 
 " him that is in heaven. Come then, thou traveller, 
 " who dost journey in Amentet.' He who is over this 
 " door openeth [it] to Ra. Sa saith unto Aqebi, ' Open 
 " thy gate to lia, unfold thy door to KiiUTi. He shall 
 "illumine the darkness, and he shall force a way for 
 " the light in the habitation which is hidden.' This 
 " door is closed after the great god hath entered 
 " through it, and there is lamentation to those who are 
 " in tlieir gateway when they hear this door close 
 " [upon them]." 
 
 Along the middle of the Tiiiinj Division we see the 
 lioat of the sun being drawn along l)y four gods, as 
 Ijefore ; the ^^od Ka stands in a slirine, similar to that 
 already descril)ed, and his companions are Sa and 
 IIekau. The roi)e l»y which the boat is towed along is 
 fastened to tlie two ends of a ^■ery remarka])le oljject, 
 in the form of a long l»eam, each end of which 
 terminates in a 1 mil's head. The acconi})aiiying text 
 
 describes it as "his boat," ^^ '^'^=^ y '^^^^^ from the fact 
 
 that the Umr gods who tow the boat are seen again at 
 ibf olhrr cud of the bcaui-liki' object, with the towing- 
 rope in their hands, it is clear tliat the boat of 11a, and 
 the god himself, were V)elieved to pass through it, from 
 one end to tlie other. The object is supported on the
 
 104 
 
 THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 shoulders of eight gods, in numiiuied form, " who are 
 called " Bearers of the gods," ^^.^^"^ (](] "^ ^ ° J I ; 
 
 at each end, innnediately behind the liuU's head, stands 
 a Inill, and at intervals seven gods, wlio are called " the 
 
 Lmt T VK ^ • i^ y ?^ -1 .^ >'• S ^ fr> 
 
 The Gods of the Third Division of the Tuat towiiiir tlic Boat, of Ka, 
 
 ' t? f^ l-TJ "T-. 
 
 .15 
 
 ^ 
 
 Tlic I'^H^ht lijarei'B cif the Boat of tlic Earth and its Seven Ciods. 
 
 I n a. 
 
 gods who arc within," ^ i — V\ V\ i, are seated 
 
 Tijioii it. At the end of this Division stand I'onr 
 ininnmicfl I'oiins, witli their ellMiws ]ir()jeeting, and 
 their hands crossed on theii hrcasls. 'Tlic Icxt
 
 KA PASSES THROUGH THE KARTH-GOD IO5 
 
 which refers to the passage of the boat of the sun 
 reads : — 
 
 
 1 
 
 A/^W\A 
 
 o 
 
 '1 
 
 i=£3^ 
 
 I I I 
 
 
 - k Q 
 
 /I\ 
 
 Ml I I I 
 
 
 A. 
 
 ^ 
 
 www cli ■ "^-^^^' 1 I 
 
 xn 
 
 ^\ 
 
 D A 
 
 /v\/vsA^ \C\ I 
 
 
 ^ inJilllllllllD 
 
 ^kii¥ihT1Ji 
 
 
 IV^^kS^li-M'JJ^T^
 
 io6 
 
 THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 i*""^ O (E m ^ 
 
 AAAAAA '^ , 5«i_ 
 
 AAAAAA 
 AA^AAA — 
 
 AV/W\ I I I 
 
 dJ 
 
 I I I [111] 
 
 , 1 1 " , A/VWVN 
 
 ra 
 
 [111] T 
 
 . (5 ^ 
 
 I AAAA/V\ AAAAAA 
 1 I [111] ^^i^^ 
 
 
 1 I A/V>AVv I 
 
 /^ 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 AAAA^\ 
 A/WVV\ 
 
 /-•^ /WWVA ■Q^} Pf^ ^ 
 
 ^ 111 ^ ^ 111 ^ <::i 
 
 A/WSAA, 
 
 ^^(^3) 
 
 D O 
 
 5 
 
 ^TP: 
 
 
 " This great god is towed along 1 )y the gods of the 
 ' Tuat, and this great god ad\'ancetli to the Boat of tlie 
 ' Earth, which is the bark of the gods. Ha saith unto 
 ' them : — ' Hail, ye gods who hear up his Boat of 
 ' the Earth, and who lift np the Bark of the Tuat, 
 'may there l)c support to your forms and liglit 
 'unto your IJark. Holy is lie \\ ho is in the ])oat 
 'of the Earth. 1 make to go ))aek the ]>ark of 
 ' the Tuat which lieareth my forms (or, attributes), 
 'and verily I travel into the hidden haliitation to 
 'perform the plans which are carried ont therein.' 
 'ExKUiiKiiATA, Ennuhkhata [saitli], 'Praised be the 
 'Soul which the J)oul)le Bull liatli swallowed, and 
 'let ihc god lie at peace willi that wliich lie hath 
 ' created.' " 
 
 The eriecl of llie abo\"e Words is lo allow the Suu- 
 ^od and his boat to pass through the double bull-
 
 RA PASSES THROUGH THE EARTH-GOD I07 
 
 headed 15oal (»f the Earth \vithi»\it any let or liinch-anee, 
 and wiien he has done tliis, — 
 
 "These gnd.s (i.e., the four gods at the other end of 
 "the JJuat of tlie Earth) say to Ea : — 'Praised lie Ha, 
 " whose Soul hath been absorbed by tlie Earth-god ! 
 " 1 'raised be the gods of Ea wlio hath rested [tlierein].' 
 "This J)oat of its Tuat rejoiceth, and there are cries 
 " from them after Ea hath passed them as lie journeyeth 
 "on his way. Their ott'eiings are the i)lants of the year, 
 
 T ^ i::: ^>1 ^ t-j. ^t^^\ A 'b ^^ 
 
 r^ ,r= «v>wM «ww« i_L^- « • '^^ I"** »c — — - r- -"^ \^ I \/ 
 f^ 1^ :zrD m^»^ ■^_ '^--w-i.^ A««M, |UM ^ T .Ti 
 
 < i "I "■III «*VW i;^'«-» 
 
 TP 
 
 IV -^ '- ^ •;^ :zrD /««^ -^ ^-^w.^.^ a««m, Iujm 1 I .r[^ 
 
 1 -a '^. '-^^— ^^^^ 11^ '-'^w'^ N.\W v^* f^ >"*^ "»€ >! I I 7^^ 
 — i /I I *;;i^ ^ fa. "^.^^ M .vAMM «■ > ...Til » 
 
 tttt ^fr#»f 
 
 The Tuat-j?otl.s address the Utnii. 
 
 "and their otl'erings arc gi\en lo them when tliey liear 
 " the words of those who draw along this great god. 
 "The gods of the Tuat(0 ^^''" [draw] the lioly Eoat 
 "in the earth say unto the Utau, whose arms are 
 " hidden : — ' O ye Utau of the earth, whose duty it is to 
 " stand( near his habitation, w hose heads are uneovered, 
 "and wlutse arms are hidden, may liiere be air t<j your 
 "nostrils, <) IItaT', and may your funeral swathings 
 " be burst o[)en, and may n'ou iia\e tlie mastery over
 
 io8 
 
 THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 V 
 
 t 
 
 I* 
 
 in« 
 
 I" 
 
 "^ 
 
 ll3a;ii: 
 
 3if ir!>ii<! 1 
 
 
 ll<4 11-11: 
 
 " your meats, and may 
 "yoii have peace (or, 
 " rest) in that which I 
 " ha^'e created. Their 
 "food is of bread 
 "cakes, and their 
 " liread is made of 
 " the red grain, the 
 " draughts whicli they 
 " drink are of [cool] 
 " water, and their meat 
 " is given unto them 
 " because of the white- 
 " ness ((»r, brilliance) 
 " of their apparel in 
 " the Tuat." 
 
 On tlie right hand 
 side of this Division 
 of the Tuat the boat 
 of the Sun passes 
 twelve shrines, each 
 (if which has its doors 
 thrown wide open, and 
 so permits us to sec a 
 god in mummied form 
 standing inside it 
 llu'sc gods are de- 
 scribed as " tlie holy 
 L;(jds who are in the 
 
 The-Twclvc holj' Goils who are lu the Tual,
 
 THE GODS OF THE BOILING LAKE 
 
 log 
 
 T-.-in^i^qfl^ii^i^- - 
 
 I* 
 
 I cm] 
 
 the frout of the twelve shrines stretches an enormous 
 serpent, the duty of which is to protect those who 
 stand in them. Beyond the shrines is a long basin 
 or lake of Iwiling water, with rounded ends, in 
 wliieli stand up to their waists twelve mummied 
 gods, witli black heads, who either have white bodies, 
 or are arrayed in wliite apparel ; in front of each god 
 grows a large ear of wheat. These gods are described 
 
 as "the gods in the l)oiling lake," ] | |nr v ' 
 
 I ^ 
 
 of beings are as follows : — 
 
 j I Jl 1 . TJie texts which relate to both groups 
 
 u 
 
 AAAA/V\ 
 I I I 
 
 I I I I 
 
 lllllllll 
 
 \ \ \ A J^ 
 
 Kl 
 
 Oil I l^= W 
 
 A/VWAA 
 
 I I I -^ 
 
 \my 
 
 I^Sfffi^l 
 
 Jta 
 
 i±i^ 
 
 /wvAAA A^AA/^^ 
 
 T— *. /vvvvv\ /vvvvv\ 
 ■£? I I I I 
 
 I I I 
 
 /NA/>AAA 
 
 ^ 
 
 in 
 
 I I I I 
 
 /-/V/>AA I 
 
 i^ 
 
 ^ w 
 
 ra 
 
 AA/Vv\A 
 
 D (2 
 
 t. 
 
 
 
 I W A 
 I ('^^^iS^^ 
 
 I rT~i 
 
 G 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 =0=111
 
 no 
 
 THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 111 
 
 A/AA/V\ ^'^^^"^ /VWAAA 
 rvW\JV\ I I I /W^A/V^ 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 A^(Vv^A H 
 
 lllllllll AAIWVS 
 
 ,1 Df 
 
 ^ 
 
 I I I I [III] D (2^^ 
 
 I I I 
 
 1^1 
 
 '0' /WVVVv 
 
 iiiiinrr 
 I 1 
 
 ,^Tifrfif 11T 
 
 V ^ ^ ^ 
 
 ^f 
 
 AfW\/V\ 
 ^VNAAA 
 
 ^_ ^ iy ^ 
 
 o m 
 I 11 I <= 
 
 /VVS/\AA — 
 
 1 I I 
 
 <:3 ili i^ 
 
 oa D n 
 
 AAAAAA 1 
 
 I s °^[ 
 
 D 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 1 
 
 ^f 
 
 ^ I V 
 
 AA/wv\ I, n 
 
 LIIIJ '^^S* — A/V^AA^ 
 
 ^ ^ CZEZl 
 
 •^^ AAAAAA ' . . ' 
 III [III] ^-^^ 
 
 ^^(^ UN ^ 
 
 C^ II II 
 
 AA/WVA 
 
 r 
 
 ~| 
 
 £^ 
 
 
 
 AAAA/^^ 
 
 _ 
 
 J 
 
 X Q. Q. Q. II I T^£P Mill 
 
 ^1 A 
 
 "^^ I 
 
 W\AAJ\A AA^A^\ 
 /^V\AAA <^ 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 J 
 
 I I I 
 
 A^AA^A I 1 I '— > 1 
 
 \\ri]'|^i=> ^l 
 
 : 1 j^ 
 
 >£^s:. 
 
 &'^[^\ 
 
 .^-\^'»:£^WM^ 
 
 £3=£ 
 
 1- 
 
 I I ^ 
 
 /^ 
 
 *— '^ AAAAAA 
 
 I I I /zzz: c^3) I 
 

 
 RA ADDRESSES THE SHENNU GODS III 
 
 W I III / \U y AA/w^^ ,^^^ M v§\ 
 
 ^ I A ^ 111 / ^ ^ III (a '^= A-.^^v 1 Jl & D 
 
 /WyWN *^ C___Z) ^ AWWv_| 
 
 " [Those Avho are iu] their shrines are the meml »ers 
 " of tlie o-od whose shrines the serpent Seti guardeth. 
 " Ea saith unto them: — 'Open ye [the doors of] your 
 " shrines, so that my radiance may penetrate the 
 " darkness in which ye are ! I found you weeping and 
 "lamenting, with your shrines tightly closed, hut air 
 " shall he given to your nostrils, and I have decreed 
 " that ye shall have abundance to overflowing [in all 
 "tilings].' And these gods say unto Ilfi : — 'Hail, Ra, 
 " come thou into our lake, thou great god who ne\'er 
 "failest.' The Shennu gods who are before and behind 
 "him i)ay homage to him, and they rejoice in Ea when 
 " he traverseth [their] region, and when tlie great god 
 "journeyeth through the secret place. Their food 
 "consisteth of loa^•es of l^read, their drink is made 
 "from the red [1)arley], and their cool waters come 
 " from [their cisterns of] water, and the serpent of fire, 
 " Seti, giveth unto them the things whereon they live 
 " there. The door which shutteth them in closeth 
 " after this god hath passed through their midst, and 
 " they utter cries of grief when they hear their doors 
 " shut upon them." 
 
 ' The text iu brackets is supplied from Lefebure, Les Hypogees 
 Rnyaux de Thebc>< (Tombeau de Seti l^', iv^ partie, pi. xiv.), Paris, 
 1886.
 
 112 
 
 f 
 "1 
 
 •D 
 
 Of ( 
 
 C>i 
 
 I 
 
 THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 nil'-'" 
 
 •' l"!* ^ ill if. 
 
 C'^M'I^ 
 
 o 
 
 KX 
 
 •^ 
 
 ■ HM:!IUI<k 
 
 i.iii<;oiiir:d-^iii*i: 
 
 The Gods of the Boiling Lake. 
 
 The following re- 
 fers to the lake of 
 water in this 
 Division : — 
 
 " [Here is] the 
 "lake of water 
 "which is in the 
 "Tuat, and it is 
 "surronnded by 
 " the gods who are 
 "arrayed in [their] 
 "apparel, and who 
 " have [their] heads 
 " uncovered. This 
 " lake is filled with 
 " oreen herbs. The 
 " water of this lake 
 " is boilmg hot, and 
 "the birds betake 
 "themselves to 
 "flight when they 
 " see the waters 
 " thereof, and when 
 " they smell the 
 " foetid smell which 
 "is in it. Unto 
 " these gods saith 
 "Ra:— '0 ye gods 
 "whose duty it is
 
 THE GODS OF THE BOILING LAKE II3 
 
 "[to guard] the green lierl>s of your lake, whose heads 
 "are unc<n'ered, and whose limbs are covered with 
 "garments, may there l)e air to your nostrils, and may 
 " otferings l)e made to you of the green herl)s, and may 
 "your meat l)e from your lake. The water thereof 
 "shall be yours, but to you it shall not be boiling, and 
 " the heat thereof shall not be upon your bodies.' 
 " These [gods] say unto Kfi : — ' Come thou unto us, 
 " thou who sailest in thy Ijoat, whose eye is of blazing 
 " fire which consuineth, and hath a pupil which sendeth 
 " forth light ! The beings of the Tuat shout with joy 
 " when thou approachest ; send forth thy light upon us, 
 " thou great god who hast fire in thine eye.' Their 
 " food consisteth of loaves of bread and green herbs, and 
 " their drink (or, beer) is of the Icemtet plants, and their 
 " cool water is from [their cisterns of] water. And food 
 " shall be given unto them in abundance from this lake." 
 On the left of the path along which the boat of Ea 
 passes in this Division of the Tuat are two groups of 
 beings. In the first of these we see the god Tem, 
 
 , in the form of an aiied man, with bent shoulders, 
 
 leaning upon a staff ; coiled up before him in voluminous 
 folds, with its head fiat upon the ground, is the monster 
 
 serpent Apep, . l>ehind Apep stand nine men, 
 
 with their arms hanging by their sides ; these are 
 
 called tlie "Tchatciia who repulse Apepi," i i ^ 
 
 In the second group is Te.m, 
 
 ^ 
 
 D D 
 VOL. II. I
 
 114 
 
 III l-^i.c^u 1- 
 
 THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 w< 
 
 I- 
 
 
 Thc Tchalcha who reiJulse Apcp. 
 
 in a similar atti- 
 tude, and before 
 him stand nine 
 gods, each hold- 
 ing the symbol 
 of life in the 
 right hand, and 
 
 the sceptre I in 
 
 the left; the nine 
 gods are called 
 " Nebu khert," 
 i.e., " Lords of 
 
 destinies," -^ i 
 
 The texts 
 ^vllich refer to 
 these groups 
 read : — 
 
 
 ^=1 
 
 J\ 
 
 J\ 
 
 a^ (2 
 
 u 
 
 ^^
 
 THE TCHATCHA WHO REPULSE APEP II5 
 
 I ^ I I I ^^ I I I D D ^ 11^ ^ i; ^3P5 D D 
 
 «>^kT?l 
 
 ^^ ^^>- ^=3 AAAA^ „ U. I I I i\ >-Q*C (T) 6) «JU. 
 
 AAAA'vA 
 
 ^^-e°SHii-_c^_U^,. ,|inu^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 s^Srni^oMI^Srrit 
 
 I I I I I s D 
 
 "I 1 /www =1 S\ I 
 
 
 fii^i^fli^^r^ 
 
 ^ 0^^^=^ 4 M
 
 ii6 
 
 THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 (5 
 
 nifv 
 
 I I I 
 
 A 
 
 ra 
 
 I I I I 
 
 r^o 
 
 £r 
 
 > AA^AAA 
 
 A/V\AAA AAAAAA 
 
 ^ 
 
 s D 
 
 
 1 ^ w^ 
 
 ^-»-^ 
 
 m-PY /O H AA/WVv 
 
 - jrSflt I lO 1 
 
 I1^¥J 
 
 J\ J\ '^ \\ \ \ 
 
 J\ 
 
 ^r?i 
 
 A 
 
 D 
 
 <^ 
 
 ^ Ul I 
 
 rsNsN^ I i 1 r 
 
 The first group shows us what " Tem hath done for 
 " Ea, aucl how he hath protected the god by words of 
 " magical power, and hath overthrown the serpent 
 " Seba. [Temu saith : — ] ' Thou art prostrate, and thou 
 " shalt never more rise up ; thou art enchanted by [my 
 " enchantments], and thou shalt never more be found. 
 " The word of my father is madt against thee, and my 
 " word is madt against thee ; I have destroyed thee for 
 " Ea, and I have made an end of thee for Khuti.' 
 
 " The company of the gods of Ea who repulse Apep 
 " say : — ' Thy head is slit, Apep, thy folds are gashed, 
 " thuu shalt never more envelop the boat of Ea, and 
 " thou shalt never again make a way into the divine 
 "bark. A flame of fire goeth out against thee from 
 " the hidden place, and we have condenmed thee to thy
 
 THE LORDS O 
 
 " dire doom.' Thuy (i.e., 
 ' the nine gods of the 
 "company of Ea) live 
 " upon the food of Ea, 
 "and upon the cakes 
 "of Khent-Amenti, for 
 " offerings are made on 
 "their behalf upon 
 " earth, and lilmtions of 
 " cool water are made 
 "unto them hy the lord 
 " of food (or, as lords of 
 " food) before Ea." 
 
 To the second group 
 of nine gods " Tem 
 saith : — ' Inasmuch as 
 " ye are the gods who 
 " possess life and sceptre 
 " (i.e., authority), and 
 " who have mastery over 
 " your sceptres, drive ye 
 " back the serpent Seba 
 " from Khuti, gash ye 
 " witli knives the foul 
 "and evil serpent Af.' 
 " These are the gods who 
 " work enchantments on 
 "Apep, who open the 
 " earth to Ea, and who 
 
 F DESTINIES (.'') 
 
 117 
 
 ?r-.ll. 
 
 V 
 
 /^ 
 
 
 in 
 
 
 
 The Lords of Destiiiie.s(?).
 
 ir8 THIRD DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " (sliut it against Apep iu the gates of Khenti-Amenti. 
 " They are those who are in the hidden place, and they 
 "praise Ea, and they destroy his enemies, and they 
 "protect the great one against the serpent Afu, and 
 " they utter cries of jo}" at the overthrow by Ea of the 
 " enemy of Ea. They live upon the meat of Ea, and 
 "on the cakes offered to Khenti-Amenti. Offerings 
 " are made on their behalf upon earth, and they receive 
 " libations through [their] word being madt in Anient, 
 " and holy are they of arm in their hidden place. 
 "They -utter cries to Ea, and they make lamentation 
 " for the great god after he hath passed by them, for 
 " when he liath departed they are enveloped in dark- 
 " ness, and their circle is closed upon them."
 
 ( Tin ) 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 THE GATE OF TCHETBI. 
 
 The Fourth Division of the Tuat. 
 
 The boat of the sun having passed through the Third 
 Division of the Tuat arrives at the gateway ^^•hicll 
 leads to the Fourtli Division. This gateway is like 
 that which admitted the god into the Third Division, 
 and its outwork is guarded l)y nine gods, in the form 
 of mummies, who are described as the " third com- 
 pany of the gods of the great god who are within," 
 III f) f=vi 
 
 entrance to tlie corridor which runs l)etween the two 
 walls is a god in munniiied form called En'UE]!KIIATA, 
 
 '^ ^n^ " , and at the exit is a similar god 
 
 called Seta-ta, v\ '^L. ; eacli god has a 
 
 uraeus over his brow, and eacli is said to " extend his 
 arms and liands to Ha," ^ § 1 ^^ ^^ 9* ^^^^ 
 corridor is swept by flames of hre which proceed from 
 the mouths of two serpents, stationed each at an 
 angle, and their " fire is for Ra." The gateway of the 
 Fourth Division is called XEi-.T-s-TcHErAF, ^ •'^^ i, 
 
 . „ (S) V I
 
 120 FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 and the text says, " This great god cometh to this 
 ''gateway, and entereth in tlu'ongh it, and the gods 
 
 " who are therein acclaim him," <=> IJ >/ | inI 
 
 - — 0' ^ v^ ' '^ ,,, U nr ' /vww\ fvi I 
 
 '^■'^^ n wl ■'■ ° • "^^^^ company of gods say to 
 
 I I I I \ — I AAAAAA r ^ 1 
 
 Ea, " Open thon the earth, force thon a way throngh 
 " the Tnat and the region which is above, and dispel 
 
 " onr darkness ; hail, Ea, come thou to ns,' 
 
 ^ O "t* I , J 2i ;^^ — H — fv (7\ NsN^N\ 
 
 1 m [][] ; "^ -^v^/^ Aw^. The monster serpent 
 
 i ' ^ i1 II I _B^ ^^=^ III 
 
 which stands on his tail and guards the gateway is 
 
 called TcHETBi, ^^ \^i ^^^'^ ^^^*^ ^^^^^ ^"^^'^ °^ ^"^^^ 
 which refer to his admission of Ea read, " He who is 
 " over this door openeth to Ea. Sa saith to Tchetbi : — 
 " ' Open [thy] gate to Ea, unfold thy doors to Khuti, 
 " that he may send light into the thick darkness, and 
 " may make his radiance illumine tlie hidden habitation.' 
 "This door is shut after this great god hath passed 
 " through it, and there is lamentation to those who are 
 " in this gateway when they hear this door close upon 
 
 rrrSr K—i^ ^^zz^ A.r~^ wm /^^ww -^ \\ iU i ^^^^=^ I I •< —
 
 rf:n=H5±i'iw^^^e=^i 
 
 . .. » . I »^— ^^— ^r—r* 
 
 
 The Gate of the Serpent Tchetbi.
 
 122 
 
 FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 D 
 
 ^ z] Ji I 
 
 ^ 
 
 ra 
 
 ■ I D 
 
 ^ n 
 
 
 
 UZZ3 
 
 [y\^\ 
 
 j\ mm ^/wws 
 
 In the middle of this Division we see tlie boat of Ea 
 lieing towed on its way by four gods of the Tuat ; the 
 god is in the same form as before, and stands in a 
 shrine enveloped by Me hen. Sa stands in the liows, 
 and Heka at the stern. Tlie boat advances to a long, 
 low building with a heavy cornice, which contains nine 
 small shrines or chapels ; in each of these is a god in 
 mummied form lying on his back. Tlie nine gods are 
 described as the "gods who follow Osiris, who are in 
 
 their abodes " (literally, " holes "), 111 ^::.^ ^ I ^ 
 
 Immediately in front of the 
 
 nine shrines are two groups, each containing six women, 
 who stand upon a slope, one half of which appears to 
 be land and the other half water; these women are 
 called " the hour goddesses which are in the Tuat," 
 
 1__^. Eacli grou}) is separated from 
 
 the otlier l)y a monster serpent of many folds called 
 
 Hereket, I ^^, and of liim it is said that he 
 
 "s])awneth twelve serpents to l)e devoured l)y tlie 
 
 o— ^ 
 
 AAW\A 
 III I I I 
 
 ^ 
 
 hours.
 
 THE GODDESSES OF THE HOURS 12^, 
 
 ^S.U?i; 
 
 
 The Gods of the Fourth Division of the Tuat towing- the Boat of Ra. 
 
 The Nine Gods who follow Osiris. 
 
 (fifi- 
 
 
 1 A .-jL-^ii 
 
 
 
 The Serpent Hereret and the Goddesses of tlie Hours.
 
 124 
 
 FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 The text relating to the passage of the boat of the sun 
 reads : — 
 
 
 \\ ) 
 
 -S^Alll 
 
 I I I ^ 
 
 Ja^ I I I Jf A I I I 
 
 tJ 
 
 ^1 
 
 D o__> ^ ^^^^ /WVSAA 
 
 s^ I I I Jl c=±i^- — a 
 
 \^\ A^^v^A^ N-^ ^ l\. ^^,^^,^ 
 I I _B^ III I I I 
 
 i:^ -<S>- 
 
 
 ■^ A^^y\^ AAAAAA 
 
 D Ji III /WWV% -A 
 
 CZSZJ 
 
 ,1 
 
 M 
 
 J\ 
 
 J\ III 
 
 If 
 
 ^ 
 
 D ^ 
 
 ^ o 
 
 zmmmmAMm 
 
 1 
 
 I I I 
 
 U I I I I 
 
 [r:=i jr' I I 1 1 I I 
 
 53>. 
 
 f 
 
 I I r\ AAAAAA 
 
 ^ I 
 
 AWVNA <=Z:>3 A/VWSA 
 111^ 
 
 i^mrnTlla:]1 
 
 Aft/WNA 
 
 o
 
 DESCRIPTIVE TEXT 
 
 125 
 
 \l 
 
 m ci Ci ^^^ g) -A" ^=^ 
 
 O A'WVVN 
 
 „ III 
 
 =0=111 ^ — 
 
 /WvWS 
 
 ^^rn^i 
 
 'WVW\ /I *?. Ill 
 
 (0 
 
 ^,,, ra 
 
 =^1 lAi I i;^^^ (s 
 
 j |U ,^AWv\^ /v\flAA^ 
 
 I I I 
 
 ^ 
 
 I I r ^ 
 
 
 lllllllll 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 I M I II II I I I I I 
 
 Ji 
 
 y^ 
 
 i I I I I <=:> 01 111^ i I I I I 
 
 nflVR 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 o 
 
 * 
 
 
 AA/^A^^ 
 
 I AAWvW 
 
 I A„WVN I I I AAAAAA jj - 
 
 I I I I /V\r^^V^ I I I 
 
 ^J) 
 
 Millie I 
 
 \\ —LL A/WWv 
 
 o 
 
 v^ [III] 
 
 i^mf 
 
 AV.AAA [ J ^2i 
 
 ==:^ III I I I LI7J 1^. 
 
 AAA/vW 
 I I I 
 
 V > II IT fVWW\ 
 
 A^ [111] 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 o 
 
 (5 I 
 
 ^. ^ 
 
 *— ' AAAAAA 
 
 '^•'^'^•^^ Ci <:i '" (7 I) C^^ I I I 
 
 [III] AA^WVA AWW\ -^i III (S III ^ 
 
 17 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 III X Oiii / — <=> ^ 
 
 A^^NAAA A/VVVAA 
 AAAAAA 1 I I 
 
 A^yVAAA 
 AAAAAA 
 A^NAAA AAAAAA 
 
 PVi^^lmk 
 
 LTZD 
 
 AVVV\\ 
 
 ^ w jji'iir 
 
 " This great god is drawn along by the gods of the 
 "Tiiat, and he journeyeth in the liidden place, and 
 " worketh in respect of the things which are there.
 
 126 FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " [He saith : — ] ' Draw ye me along, ye beings of the 
 " Tuat, look ye upon me, [for] I have created you. 
 " TuU ye with your arms and draw ye me therewith, 
 " and turn ye aside to the eastern part of heaven, to 
 " the habitations which surround Ares (or, Sar) [and 
 " to] that hidden mountain, the light (or, radiance) of 
 " which goeth round about among the gods who receive 
 " me as I come forth among you into the hidden place. 
 " Draw ye me along, [for] I work on your behalf in the 
 " gateway which covereth over the gods of the Tuat.' " 
 
 " And Ea saith unto them : — ' Look ye upon me, 
 " gods, for I strike those who are in their sepulchres, 
 " [saying]. Arise, ye gods ! I have ordered for you the 
 " plan and manner of your existence, ye who are in 
 ' your sepulchres, whose souls are broken, who live 
 " upon your own filth and feed upon your own offal, 
 " rise up before my Disk, and put ye yourselves in a 
 " right state by means of my l)eams. The duties which 
 "ye shall ha^•e in the Tuat are in conformity with the 
 " things which 1 have decreed for you.' Their food 
 " consisteth of flesh, and their ale is [made] of the red 
 " [barley], and their libations are of cool water. There 
 " is lamentation to them after they have heard their 
 " doors close upon them." 
 
 In respect of the twelve goddesses of the hours it is 
 said : — " [These are] they who stand upon their lake, 
 " and it is they who guide lia in a straight line by 
 " means of their instruments. To them Ra saith : — 
 " ' Hearken, (J ye goddesses of the hours of the night
 
 KA S ADDRESS TO THE HOURS I27 
 
 "sky. Work ye, and eat ye, and rest ye in your 
 "gateways, with your breasts towards the darkness, 
 "and your hind-parts towards the light. Make to 
 " stand up the serpent Hereret, and live ye upon that 
 " which conieth forth from it. It is your duty in the 
 " Tuat to eat up the spawn of Hekeuet, and ye shall 
 " destroy that which cometh forth from it. Draw ye 
 " me, for I have begotten you in order that ye may pay 
 " homage [to me]. Take ye your rest (or, be at peace), 
 " ( ) ye Hours ! ' Their food consisteth of cakes of 
 " bread, and their ale is [made] of the red [barley], and 
 " their -draughts are of cool water, and there is given 
 " unto them as their food that which cometh forth with 
 "the kltit (i.e., the l)eatitied dead)." 
 
 On the right hand of the path of the boat of the 
 Sun in the Fourth Division we see : — 1. Twelve gods, 
 1)earded and standing upright, who are called "the 
 
 gods who carry along their doubles," | | | "Jy ^ -'-^ 
 . , .2. Twelve iackal-headed gods, who stand 
 
 round the " Lake of Life," c/ T ® ' ""^^^^ ^^^ 
 
 called the "jackals in the lake of life," ' T J "y ')^ 
 -^k v^ I -r ^ . 3. Ten uraei, which stand round 
 the " Lake of the Uraei," JL i , and are called the 
 
 " Livhig Uraei," h ;^ ^ '^ ^ "f" ^ 'l • ^^^^ ^^^^^ 
 which refer to these tliree groups of beings read: —
 
 128 FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 Jr III Li III! I I f^ TTl 
 
 
 :::!^ 
 
 ^^ D (3 i> I <=> I Jl II I - — aj\ I 
 
 M-t^ 
 
 CZ^ 
 
 I ' - ^ I /www /^vwv\ 
 
 1 
 
 - — 1 I 1 1 M I I I \"\"\ n II I I o III I I I 
 
 o— — s A^A^A^ ft 
 
 o o s I — ' *^3' 
 
 ^^^■^^^^ /VW\AA AV^A^^ ^ ^^ A/WV\A 
 
 i-j 
 
 ^^ .^o 
 
 I A^^vAAA 
 
 I I I I A^AAA^ 
 
 [rzD 
 
 I I 
 
 ra 
 
 1 I I I ^ o e 
 
 ^ w 
 
 ra 
 
 AAAAAA 
 A/VWW 
 
 ' n D 
 
 ra 
 
 jfj^ ^tt^^ /Tti I '^'^^''^ 
 
 ra t 
 
 I I I 
 
 ^ 
 
 AA/w^^ I I I 
 
 Ml"-' 
 
 I AAIWVA 
 
 I II tl I M 
 
 7^ 
 
 <^ 
 
 AA/WAA JL AAAAAA 
 11 I I I I I 
 
 fl^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -e- 
 
 V 
 
 [— ^] 
 
 mo 
 
 D 
 
 AA/wyv^ 
 
 £5=5 
 
 I I 
 
 I ^ 
 
 \=^ 
 
 II I I ^ <=> ITI I I I iTl 
 
 1 
 
 311] D 
 
 
 Tl I AAAA/Vv I W I AAAAAA 
 I I I I I S II 1
 
 DESCRIPTIVE TEXTS 12g 
 
 — Q-^ r^xn s=3 ^^ "2^ Ik ^ '^ J I ^-Q-^ C3XZ1 s=> 
 
 ^ D 11 I I I I -^- _^ J^ I I I ^^^ I III B I SIM 
 
 1 1 II o ml '^z:^ /= '^z^ <=>U f \> 'vz:^ I III 
 
 ^:=^( ^ w ^ I I I ^= ^ III / ^ III .wwvN ^ 
 
 m^ ^ — •* — ^ — •• — 'fL J\ 
 
 D =0= I -^^ e ^/ «^=> 111^ _^ III"-' .m I I 
 
 iQ> — ••— n tk ^—^ """" j^ (^^ — ^*— / — I / — 
 
 1 1 1 II I iH jrt;::^! I /<-% I I'^i 1 1^^371'rri 
 
 AA,Vj\^ 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 D ™^^|tKrn^o^^ 
 
 II \> AAA^WS I I I /WWV\ V _Zr ( J^ I I I I J\ 
 
 -I 
 
 I I I C=i=^ I 
 
 r\N\N\r\ 
 
 
 I Ly n \ C^ AA^^\ ^ III W /w>A/v% Q::£l ^^ 
 
 I lu 't^J I Ml 2^..=^ ^'t^ ^ '* M I ^ (2 M I I 
 
 Tlie paragraph which refers to the first twelve gods 
 reads : — 
 
 " [These are] they who bear along their doubles, 
 "who immerse themselves in that which floweth in 
 " abundance from the slaughtered ones during the time 
 " of their existence, and who carry the offerings which 
 " are rightly due [to the god] to his abode. Unto them 
 VOL. II. K
 
 130 FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " saith Ra : — ' That which belongeth to you [to do], 
 " ye gods who are among your offermgs, is to offer as 
 "an obligatory offering your doubles. Ye have your 
 " own offerings, your enemies are destroyed, and they 
 " are not. Your spirits are on their thrones, [and your] 
 " souls are on their places.' They say unto Ra, ' Adora- 
 "tions be unto thee, Ra-Khuti ! Hail to thee, 
 " thou Soul who art protected in the earth ! Hail to 
 " thee, as being eternity, the lord of the years and of 
 " the everlastingness which hath no diminution.' Their 
 " food consisteth of offerings, their drink is of cool 
 " water, and there is lamentation to them when they 
 " hear their doors close upon them. Their food is given 
 "to them from the goddess Mu-sta(?) by Tesert-baiu." 
 
 The paragraph which refers to the jackal-headed 
 gods reads : — 
 
 " [These are] they who come forth from this lake 
 " whereunto the souls of the dead cannot approach by 
 " reason of the sanctity which is therein. Unto them 
 " saith Ra : — ' That which belongeth to you [to do], ye 
 " gods who are in this lake, is to keep guard upon your 
 " lives in your lake ; your offerings are under the guard 
 " of the jackals which have set themselves on the edge 
 " of your lake.' They say unto Ra : — ' Immerse thyself, 
 " Ra, in thy holy lake, wherein the lord of the gods 
 " immersed himself, whereunto the souls of the dead 
 " approach not ; this is what thou thyself hast com- 
 "manded, Kiiuti.' Their food consisteth of bread, 
 " their drink is [made] of the red [barley], and their
 
 THE GODS OF THE LAKE OF LIFE, ETC. I3I 
 
 The Twelve Gods who carry their Doubles 
 
 -r:;;Sav^^£IPg^tlf:\^fr^lllKS5g)* 
 
 I?- 
 
 IrJlD^illiilO. .:uJIl^ilPji^ 
 
 The Twelve Gods of the Lake of Life. 
 
 The Ten Living Uruoi of tlie Lake of the Uraei.
 
 132 FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " vessels of drink are filled with wine. There is lamen- 
 " tation among them when they hear their doors close 
 " upon them. Their food is given nnto them as lord[s] 
 " of their sceptres round about this lake." 
 
 The paragraph which refers to the uraei reads : — 
 " [These are] they who have their speech after Ea 
 " cometh to them, and souls are turned backwards, and 
 "shadows are destroyed at the hearing of the words 
 " (or, voices) of the uraei. Unto them saith Ea: — 'That 
 " which belongeth to you [to do], ye Uraei who are 
 " in this lake, is to guard your flames and your fires [so 
 " that ye may hurl them] against my (literally, his) 
 " enemies, and your burning heat against those whose 
 "mouths are evil. Hail to you, Uraei.' They 
 " say unto Ea : — ' Come thou to us, stride thou over 
 " Tanen.' " 
 
 On the left of the path of the boat of the sun 
 through the Fourth Division we see the god Osiris, in 
 mummied form, and wearing on his head the crown 
 of the South, standing on a serpent, and partially 
 covered by the earth of a mountain ; his head only 
 is above the ground, and he stands in a naos with a 
 vaulted dome. His name or title, Khent Amenti, 
 
 ^£yft, is written by his side. Before the shrine is a 
 
 Flame-goddess in the form of a uraeus, and behind her 
 are twelve gods, who stand in front of Heru-ur (or, 
 Horus the Aged), the Haroeris of the later Greek 
 writers. Heru-ur is in the form, of a hawk-headed
 
 THE GODS OF THE PITS I33 
 
 man, who leans on a staff. Behind the shrine 
 which contains Osiris stand twelve gods, who are 
 described as " the gods who are behind the shrine," 
 
 mi'f''^^IVS* Behind, or by the side 
 of these, are four pits or hollows in the ground, by the 
 side of each of which stands a god, with his body bent 
 forward in adoration before a bearded god, who holds 
 the symbol of life in the right hand and a sceptre in the 
 left. The four gods are called " Masters of their pits," 
 
 I I I I I I 
 
 '•'''-'^, and their lord is 
 
 called the " Master of Earths (?)," "^ "^ %^ I . 
 The texts referring to these gods read : — 
 
 C30 0=::: lllll ::==tajs; 
 
 '^'^VV rl <71 11 4ci I AAVSAA ft ^ I i-£ — , A/V^/^A [ '^ 
 
 ■Z^JimJoi -^^ ^ W I' <=> Ml ^^^3^ I ^^^ LT 
 
 LZm 
 
 
 I 1 I A 11^ ^^ 
 
 /\AA/V\A '^ 
 
 III 6r-^ sy o o I 
 
 
 iit^^iJ5i^^k±wi:if
 
 134 
 
 A'. 
 
 FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 ^Kf]Sfy 
 
 AJ 
 
 B \'=^ ^ 
 f^^^ 
 
 
 o I ra D ^^z^ 
 
 (p — ** — '0' 
 
 iiilV^W' — liiiYm^l u^nl 
 
 I I I 
 
 tkl 
 
 N\N\NS 
 
 ^ w 
 
 J\ 
 
 (i 
 
 w 
 
 AAAA/V\ fl AWVNA 
 
 I I I Ji III I I I 
 
 7^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 D D 
 
 01 
 
 
 AAAAAA ^, 
 I I I 
 
 (0 ^ 
 
 i~^^~~i 
 
 o 
 
 AAA/VV\ 
 I I I 
 
 [331 
 
 I I I 
 
 l^H 
 
 I ^ " ^ 1 A/V\AAA 
 I I I I I I 
 
 ^^ 
 
 I I I 
 
 AAA/W\ 
 I I I 
 
 3) I A^ lll^=<CZ:>^ 111 Jl A 
 
 AA^AyV\ /^AAAAA /VWWV 
 
 II I A'^WW 
 
 /w^ryvK I 1 I 
 
 ^1 
 
 t I I /= 1 w 

 
 OSIRIS KHENT-AMENTI I35 
 
 ^ W .^^ ++ ^^'^ I III <=:> I .vwwv 1 I I ^ O I 1 I 
 
 I ^ <c^ )y II II I I I TT 
 
 
 /VVWV\ 
 AAAAAA 
 
 - ■ fl *~ ^ I I I AAA/VV\ I I AAAAAA A AAAAAA "W I I /T | 
 
 The text referring to Horus reads : — 
 
 "Horus worketh on behalf of his father Osiris, he 
 " performeth magical ceremonies for him, and restoreth 
 " to him the crown [, saying], ' My heart goeth out to 
 " thee, my father, thou who art avenged on those 
 " who would work against thee, and in all the matters 
 "which concern thee thou art guided by magical 
 " ceremonies. Thou hast the mastery, Osiris, thou 
 "hast the sovereignty, Khenti Amenti, thou hast 
 " whatsoever is thine as Governor of the Tuat, thou 
 " whose forms (or, attributes) are exalted in the hidden 
 "place; the beatified spirits hold thee in fear, and 
 " the dead are terrified at thee. Thy crown hath been 
 "restored unto thee, and I, thy son Horus, have 
 " reckoned thy weakness there.' " 
 
 The twelve gods who are in front of the shrine of 
 Khenti Amenti say : — 
 
 " Let Him of the Tuat be exalted ! Let Khenti 
 " Amenti be adored ! Thy son Horus hath restored to
 
 136 FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " thee thy crown, he hath protected thee by means of 
 "magical ceremonies, he hath crushed for thee thine 
 " enemies, he hath brought to thee vigour for thy arms, 
 " Osiris, Khenti Amenti." 
 
 In reply to this address of the twelve gods Khenti 
 Amenti saith unto his son Horus : — 
 
 " Come to me, my son Horus, and avenge me on 
 " those who work against me, and cast them to him 
 " that is over the things which destroy, [for] it is he 
 " who guardeth the pits [of destruction]." 
 
 Then saith Horus unto those gods who are behind 
 the shrine : — 
 
 "Make inquisition for me, gods who are in the 
 " following of Khenti Amenti, 'stand ye up, and with- 
 " draw ye not yourselves, and be ye masters over 
 " yourselves, and come, and live delicately on the bread 
 " of Hu, and drink ye of the ale of Maat, and live ye 
 " upon that whereon my father liveth there. That 
 " which belongeth to you in the hidden place is to be 
 " behind the shrine, according to the commandment of 
 " Ka. I call unto you, and behold, it is for you to do 
 " what it is your duty [to do].' Their meat consisteth 
 "of cakes of bread, and their ale is of the tchesert 
 " drink, and their libations are [made with] cool water. 
 " Their food is given unto them by the guardian of 
 " the things which are in the shrine. And Horus 
 " saith unto these gods : — ' Smite ye the enemies of my 
 " father, and hurl ye them down into your pits because 
 " of that deadly evil which they have done against the
 
 The Twelve Gods before the Shrine. 
 
 Heni-ur. 
 
 ^=1 .^j>vsff5''a?vrffi!sllt/^J t S 
 
 The Twelve Gods behind the Shrine. 
 
 Osiris The goddess 
 Khent- of Flame 
 Amenti. (Nesert). 
 
 -° issxs; ^^ '^^ ^ fli'* ^^^^i^ • • • ''**** ^'^^ -^^ ^M I (^ .3^ 
 
 The Master 
 of Earths. 
 
 The Four Masters of their Pits.
 
 138 FOURTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " Great One, [which] found (?) him that begot me. 
 " That which belongeth to you to do in the Tuat is to 
 " guard the pits of fire according as Ka hath commanded, 
 " and I set [this] before you so that, behold, ye may do 
 "according to what belongeth to you [to do].' This 
 " god standeth over (or, by) the pits."
 
 ( 139 ) 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 THE GATE OF TEKA-HRA. 
 
 The Fifth Division of the Tuat. 
 
 The boat of the sun having passed through the Fourth 
 Division of the Tuat arrives at the gateway which 
 leads to the Fifth Division. This gateway is similar 
 to that which guards the Fourth Division, and is 
 guarded by nine gods, who are described as the 
 
 " Fourth Companv," '^ ^ ; at the entrance to the 
 
 corridor and at its exit stands a jackal-headed god, the 
 
 former being called Aau, - o ^^ v\ , and the latter 
 
 Tekmi, ^zi^ [1 (1 ; each is said to " extend his arms and 
 
 hands to Ra." The corridor is swept by flames of fire, 
 
 as before. The gateway is called Arit, (J nn , 
 
 and the text says, " This great god cometh to this 
 " gateway, and entereth in through it, and the gods 
 
 " who are therein acclaim him," <=:zr> fl | 
 
 - fl 
 
 <~~> I 1^-^ ViC^ 1 AAA/V\^ — U 
 
 1 V 1 111 1 "H" ^ ^ ^ i P- ^^'' ''"'' sods say to
 
 140 FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 Ea, " Ea-Heru-khuti unfoldeth our doors, and openeth 
 " our gateways. Hail, Ea, come thou to us, great 
 
 A/WVV\ 
 
 god, lord of hidden nature," ^^ Tnnnir tzs: 
 
 ^ -mmnr | I | I I I ^i — 
 
 
 J^ 
 
 1 
 
 A 3 nwn . The monster serpent whicli stands on his 
 
 tail and guards the gateway is called Teka-hra, i j ^, 
 
 and the two lines of text which refer to his admission 
 of Ea read : — " He who is over this door openeth to Ea. 
 " Sa satth to Teka-hra : — ' Open thy gate to Ea, unfold 
 " thy doors to Khuti, that he may send light into the 
 " thick darkness, and may make his radiance illumine 
 " the hidden habitation.' This door is shut after the 
 "great god hath passed through it, and there is 
 " lamentation to those who are in this gateway when 
 " they hear this door close upon them." As the hiero- 
 glyphic text is identical with that given above on 
 p. 120 it is not repeated here. 
 
 In the middle of this Division we see the boat of Ea 
 being towed on its way by four gods of the Tuat ; the 
 god is in the same form as before, and stands in a shrine 
 enveloped by Mehen. Sa stands in the bows, and Heka 
 at the stern. In front of tliose who tow the boat are nine 
 shrouded gods, with ])r()jccting elbows; each of these 
 holds in his hands a part of the body of a long, slender ser- 
 pent, and the group is called " those who hold Ennutchi,"
 
 \\^^:T3^\\^(smm 
 
 If 
 
 • ■ 
 
 
 
 1i 
 
 •'•' •*-•- -* *• -*•- '«**'•- 
 
 The.Gate of the Serpent Tcka-lira,
 
 142 
 
 FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 twelve bearded beings, who are advancing towards a god, 
 
 who is styled [the god] " of his angle," zi J CTID ; 
 
 the twelve gods are described as Baiu reth-ammu- 
 TUAT, i.e., " the souls of the men who are in the Tuat," 
 
 I - 
 I u 
 
 
 1 
 
 I i< 
 
 II ^ 
 rzDJ . — - 
 
 . The texts read : — 
 
 The Boat of Ra being towed by the Gods of the Fifth Division of the Tuat. 
 
 A/WVV\ 
 
 -^-^ Jf II I W ^ III 
 X III VS\ ,vww\ P- 
 
 ra t>^ I 
 
 /VWV\A 
 
 o 
 
 I I I 
 
 fl 
 
 D 
 
 '^VV/^V^ AAAA/V\ I AAAAAA 
 
 1 I |c=^^ U| I |<^ 
 
 III I I I A M 1 
 
 J^ I ^ 
 
 AAAAAA I AAAAAA 
 Ji ^11 I I 
 
 II I I ( _^ ^ =0" II 
 
 I I nnnmri | | ^ 10 
 
 AAA/V\A 
 
 z] I r~vn I ® 
 ^ O I .-^-^ I ^ 
 
 I I I 
 
 ! D m 
 
 .(5
 
 DESCRIPTIVE TEXTS 
 
 143 
 
 D B 
 
 
 /WWW 
 
 I I I 
 
 y\ o 
 
 rJ I /wvw\ 
 
 D D 
 
 ox ^ 
 <=> LU I I 1 (^ 
 
 t| n AAAAAA 
 
 I I II I I 
 
 
 Jl 
 
 /WW\A 
 
 O (3 ^ 
 
 Ib 
 
 A^V\^W\ ' I AAA/\AA 
 
 I I I I A/^W\A - ■■ ll I I I 
 
 I I I I I I <^<; 
 
 I I I I 
 
 (2 
 
 A^W^A^ ] 
 
 ^^^^lil^flV 
 
 /VA/VVV\ 
 
 I I I 
 
 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 I I I 
 
 /WWW 
 
 ^ 
 
 © 
 
 \ 
 
 "^ 
 
 I ^ <=> I I I 
 
 s II I I 1^11! Q. I I I ^ 1 I I 
 
 T1m?f]? 
 
 rrrn 
 II 
 
 AATSAAA A/NA/VV\ 
 
 1 I I 
 
 '^ /^Ay\AA^ 
 
 I 1 I •,■■;■■; ^ 
 
 AVyvW III'—' 
 
 w 
 
 1 I 1 />A/WW I I I 
 
 A/VVAA 
 
 Jc^^ 
 
 ./^. 
 
 I I I 
 
 
 
 w o 
 
 AAAAA'N A'WWi 
 
 II I /V^VW\ 
 I I AAAAAA /^AWSA^ 
 
 
 ^ u 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 A^^^y\A 
 A^^\AA/\ 
 
 AAA/VW 
 I I I 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 I I I AAAAAA 
 
 ±Jc^1i\iM^Yl^-
 
 144 FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 "The gods of the Tuat draw along this great god, 
 "and he journeyeth through the hidden place. [Ea 
 " saith : — ] ' Draw ye me along, ye gods of the Tuat, 
 "and sing praises unto me, ye who are at the head 
 " of the stars ; let your cords be strong (or, vigorous), 
 "and draw ye me along by means of them, and let 
 " your hands and arms be steady, let there be speed in 
 " your legs, let there be strong intent in your souls, 
 " and let your hearts be glad. Open ye a prosperous 
 " way into the chambers {qerti) of hidden things.' " 
 
 The Nine Gods who hold Ennutchi. 
 
 The text relating to the bearers of the serpent reads : — 
 "Those who are in this scene carry this serpent. 
 "Ea striketh them and advanceth towards them to 
 " make himself to rest in [the gateway called] Nebt- 
 " AHAU, This serpent travelleth as far as it (i.e., this 
 "gateway), but he passeth not beyond it. Ea saith 
 " unto them : — ' Strike ye the serpent Ennutchi there, 
 " give him no way [whereby to escape], so that I may 
 "pass by you. Hide your arms, destroy that which
 
 HUMAN SOULS OF THE TUAT I45 
 
 "you guard, protect that which cometh into being 
 " from my forms, and tie ye up (or, fetter) that which 
 "cometh into being from my strength.' Their food 
 " consisteth of the hearing of the word of this god, and 
 " offerings are made to them from the hearing of the 
 " word of Ea in the Tuat." 
 
 " Unto those who have spoken what is right and 
 " true upon earth, and who have magnified the forms 
 " of the god, Itii saith : — ' Praises shall be [sung] to 
 
 
 Heri-qenbet-f. The souls of meu who are in the Tuat. 
 
 " your souls, and there shall be breath to your nostrils, 
 "and there shall be to you joints in Sekhet-aru. 
 " That which shall be indeed yours is what belongeth 
 " to the Maati CxODS. The habitations which shall be 
 "yours shall be (or, are) at the corner where [live] 
 " those who are with me who weigh words for them.' 
 "Their food is of bread-cakes, and their drink of 
 " tchesert drink, and their libations are of cool water. 
 " Offerings are made unto them upon earth as to the 
 VOL. II. L
 
 146 FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " god IJetepi, according to what should be offered unto 
 " them." 
 
 Ea saith unto this god : — " Let him that is over his 
 " Corner (Heri-qenbet-f) cry out to those souls who 
 " are right, and true, and divine, and make them to sit 
 "at peace in their habitations at the Corner of those 
 " who are with myself." 
 
 On the right hand of the path of Ea in the Fifth 
 Division of the Tuat are : — 1. Twelve male beings 
 bowing in adoration ; they are described as " those 
 
 who make adorations in the Tuat," ' '-' (1(1 ^ ^ 1 
 (1 - - \\ ^ I '^'^ . 2. Twelve male beings who bear 
 
 in their hands a cord for measuring plots of ground 
 and estates ; these are called " Holders of the cord in 
 
 the Tuat," ^%i^%Se|\^"^. 3. Four 
 
 gods, standing upright, each holding the symbol of life 
 in his right hand, and a sceptre in the left. The 
 hieroglyphic texts which relate to these groups 
 read : — 
 
 ni 
 
 /WWV\ ^'^'^^^ AAA^AA 
 
 I I I O O I 
 
 I I Jr I 1 s (ii 111 m ^-=^ c^ II I I _Mir iJi^zD 
 
 J o / ? r\ j iii m ii i . ^-^ r, aaa/w\ AA^^^^ h W A 
 
 "D t^ . . - — a %^ (5 111 '■'•''^ n 
 
 O Jl -^iz^ <=> °^ SGiiPl I I I 
 
 A^A/^AA 
 
 I I I 

 
 GODS WHO MEASURE LAND AND THEIR OVERSEERS I47 
 
 ^^ I AAAAAA II ^N r 
 
 II I \ ^ 
 
 111^ ° 
 
 I ^AAA^^ 
 
 A/VAA-V^ I 
 
 -H -^ / TK 1 AAAAAA, 
 
 ^ D 
 
 A^:^m^eio 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 AVNAAA 
 »*— 
 
 I I I 
 
 O I 
 
 I I 
 
 AAAAAA 
 AAAAAA 
 
 A 
 
 ]\ 
 
 lO ^^ 
 
 oiuy 
 
 \=^ CJ^m 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^AAA niH 
 
 A^WAA I I I I II 
 
 ra 
 
 m 
 
 AAAAAA P^^'^'^ 
 
 V III 
 
 ^ 
 
 I D © 
 
 (p r\ .iiiimiii. 
 
 ' ' AAAA/V\ 
 
 '^ 
 
 I ' ' " ' ■ AAAAAA r~ \ 
 
 A^/w^^ _/J I aaaaaa I I I D (^ 
 
 (2 i5^ I AAAAAA 
 
 /^ *^ --* I /VVWNA LI I IJ 
 
 -^ 
 
 XlwlwII'm yiii<=><^ n I I I I I 
 
 ■il 
 
 AA/W\A 
 
 /vvvvv\ ^<t=^fc 
 
 nil I I Jriii 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 T 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 ^ III 
 
 A^V\AAA 
 AAA/W\ 
 
 I I l_> 
 
 
 II 
 
 D '^ 
 
 0/l_ AAyvvv\ 
 
 /WVAAA 
 AAAAAA 
 
 I i' I I ^ 
 
 AAA/W\ 
 
 I I I 
 
 (a n tt-^ „^4^ -<o- f^ |^ m ^ 
 
 I H— AAAAAA "^ ^^^ 
 
 I llllZSZlj 1 I I M -^ 
 
 ^^= Q 
 II ^ III I 
 
 III 
 
 I I I 
 
 cO] 
 
 ^ w 
 
 A/V^AAA -- 
 A^VW\ I I I O I II 
 
 — £^ A/AAAA 
 I I I 
 
 ^H^^^ 
 
 
 I r=^ 
 
 c=> III M I 
 
 iii^izz^m 
 
 AA/V^A 
 I I I 
 
 Ci f\ 
 
 "'"iin^ I 
 
 1^ 
 
 -O. 
 
 III! II 
 
 I I I 
 
 g^lk
 
 148 
 
 FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 I AAAAAA iCN . 
 
 Ci n 
 
 tl 
 
 I < '> I I 1 A ^AAAAA 
 
 L_ I 'V\^/V\A 
 
 1 
 
 I ■^ 1 b e 
 
 AA/\^\A Q (p ft /-^ 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 i\;\r^/\/\f\ isrv\/~jvs I 
 
 111 
 
 -^ 
 
 III 
 
 \. 
 
 A'WVN^ tl 
 
 1^1 l\. 111 
 
 1 
 
 '^M^A\u^mm'^m\^Bi^L\^^um*\m'i' 
 
 The Twelve Gods who make adoration iu the Tunt. 
 
 ^111 
 
 ^h. 
 
 ft M- 
 
 (^ ©o D 
 
 The passage in the text which refers to the adorers 
 reads : — 
 
 " [These are] they who make songs to Ra in Amentet 
 "and exalt Heru-khuti. [These are they w'ho] knew 
 " Ra upon earth, and who made offerings imto liim. 
 " Their offerings are in their place, and their glory
 
 THE GODS OF THE MEASURING CORD 149 
 
 " is in the holy place of Anient. They say unto 
 " Ea : — ' Come thou, Ea, progress through the Tuat. 
 " Praise he to thee ! Enter thou among the holy 
 " [places] with the serpent Mehen.' Ea saith unto 
 " them : — ' There are offerings for you, ye who made 
 " offerings. I am content with what ye did for me, 
 " both when I used to shine in the eastern part of 
 " heaven, and when I was sinking to rest in the 
 "chamber of my Eye.' Their food is of the bread- 
 
 The Twelve Gods who hold the cord for measuring land. 
 
 "cakes of Ea, and their drink is of his tclieser drink, 
 " and their libations are made of cool water, and 
 " offerings are made unto them on the earth in [return] 
 " for the praisings which they make unto Ea in Anient." 
 
 The passage in the text which refers to the holders 
 of the measuring cord reads : — 
 
 " [These are they who] hold the measuring cord in 
 " Anient, and they go over therewith the fields of 
 " the Khu (i.e., the beatified spirits). [Ea saith to
 
 150 FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " them] : — ' Take ye the cord, draw it tight, and mark 
 "out the limit (or, passage) of the fields of Amentet, 
 " the Khu whereof are in your abodes, and the gods 
 " whereof are on your thrones.' The Khu of JSTeterti 
 " are in the Field of Peace, [and] each Khu hath been 
 "judged by him that is in the cord. Eighteousness 
 " is to those who are (i.e., W' ho exist), and unrighteous- 
 " ness to those who are not, Ea saitli unto them : — 
 " ' What is riglit is the cord in Ament, and Ea is 
 "content with the stretching (or, 
 - >>...^— T-7-M-"*' .F' " drawing) of the same. Your 
 ...V -■■■.■ ■ ..,,._...... ■■■.■. ■ " possessions are yours, ye gods. 
 
 TT^'i^—'j"^— " your homesteads are yours, ye 
 
 ^i^V^^gg "Khu. Behold ye, Ea maketh 
 
 C^iyiDiii^ "(oi*. worketh) your fields, and 
 
 " he commandeth on your behalf 
 
 " that there may be sand (?) with 
 
 "you."' 
 
 The Four Henbi Gods. " Hail, joumcy OU, KHUTI, for 
 
 " verily the gods are content with 
 " that which they possess, and the Khu are content 
 " with their homesteads. Their food [conieth] from 
 " Sekhet-Aru, and their offerings from that which 
 " springeth up therein. Offerings are made unto them 
 " upon earth from the estate of Sekhet-Aru." 
 
 To the four bearded gods Ea saith : — " Holy are ye, 
 " Henbi gods, ye overseers of the cords in Amentet. 
 " [0 stablish ye fields and give [them] to the gods and 
 "to the Khu (i.e., spirits) [after] they have been
 
 THE FOUR RACES OF MEN 15I 
 
 " measured in Sekhet-Aaru. Let them give fields and 
 " sand to the gods and to the souls who are in the Tuat. 
 "Their food shall be from Sekhet-Aaru, and their 
 " offerings from the things which spring forth therein]." 
 On the left of the path of the boat of Ea are: — 
 1. A hawk-headed god, leaning upon a staft^; he is 
 
 called Horns, ^. 2. Four groups, each group con- 
 taining four men. The first are Retii, ^ ^ ^^ ! ' 
 the second are Aamu, ) ^ "^ I , the tliird are Nehesu, 
 ^ I n % I , and the fourth are Themehu, ^^ ^ I . 
 The Reth are Egyptians, the Aamu are dwellers in 
 the deserts to the east and north-east of Egypt, the 
 Nehesu are the black races and Negkoes, and the 
 The.mehu are the fair-skinned Libyans. 3. Twelve 
 bearded beings, each of whom grasps with both hands 
 the body of a long serpent; these are called the 
 
 " Holders of the period of time in Anient," ^^ ^ ^ I , 
 ^^. 4. Eicjht bearded gods, who are 
 
 called the " Sovereign chiefs of the Tuat," U ^5 ^ Jj i 
 ^^ . The hieroglyphic text which relates to these 
 groups reads : — 
 
 
 '^I-^i^l.^iSflii
 
 152 
 
 FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 ^i^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 <£f ^ AArVW^ A^WvAA 
 
 ^ V^ 1 I I www 
 
 AV^WN /WWV\ 
 
 /WVA/V\ 
 
 A'V\/VV\ 
 
 I I I I ^ 
 
 IV' 
 
 l/WVW\J AAA/^^A ^ 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 -H_0 I 
 
 I ^ D 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 AAAAAA 
 A^A/W\ 
 
 t. 
 
 o 
 
 \X AA/W\A 
 
 I I I 
 
 
 .^/^/^/v^A 
 1 
 
 ^^AA^^ — h — 
 A^/v\'^^ 
 
 l?:^ I 
 
 I I I 
 
 A/VSAAA 1 ^ VX 
 
 '0,fK'l4» 
 
 O I I 1 ^\ 
 
 n 
 
 III ^ cz:zi <=:> I ^ /= ^ I AA^, 
 
 n? «^ D ^ ('^u) -(0- I H (2 o I ^ 
 
 ■i-^" III r^^^^ Ci ^ jf^ I Y 1^ 
 
 ~ — -* A/^v\AA 111^ W /WWW I A O '^.-^^ — _ix\j> I L 
 
 y 
 
 A 
 
 I I 
 
 AAAA/V\ 
 I I I 
 
 II II 
 
 ^ 
 
 I I I 
 
 ^^^ I I 1 === {\ A\ I I t^ (^ 
 
 O III ^ III 
 
 ^ 
 
 /^vwv\ 
 
 AAA/VV\ I I I 
 
 v/VWV Wr 1
 
 THE FOUR RACES OF MEN 
 
 153 
 
 AWA« ,«^^ > * ^ « ^*VWWVW»"» »^r^l I l«^9 '-K 
 
 The Aamu, i.e., Asiatics. The Reth, i.e., Eo-jiitians. Horns. 
 
 .vwwv^ -.14-$ ^ '^^^^ K -±- 217 ^^ "^^^ \.^ 
 
 
 The Thomelui, i.e., Libyaus, 
 
 The Neliesu, i.e., Xegroes.
 
 154 
 
 FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 — H — A^^A/v^ —*i — 
 III ^ III 
 
 ^^ 
 
 o 
 
 I ^^^ AAAAAA ® I 
 
 iJ II I <::=> ^ o I 
 
 sl I 
 
 J 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 I AA/WV\ 
 
 I A/VWV\ 1_ 
 
 A 
 
 ^ 
 
 I I I I I 
 
 I I I 
 
 '''■'^AA/NA /•^\/^./\/\/\ 
 
 The passage which refers to the four groups, each 
 containing four men, reads : — 
 
 Horus saith unto the creatures of Ea who dwell in 
 the r.lack Land (Qemt, i.e., Egypt) and in the Eed 
 Land (i.e., the deserts which lie on each side of the 
 Black Land formed of the mud of the Nile): — "Magical 
 "protection be unto you, ye creatures of Ka, who 
 " have come into being from the Great One who is at 
 " the head of heaven ! Let there be breath to your 
 " nostrils, and let your linen swathings be unloosed ! 
 " Ye are the tears ^ of the eye of my splendour in your 
 " name of Eeth (i.e., men). Mighty of issue ( Aa-mu) 
 "ye have come into Ijeing in your name of Aamu; 
 " Sekhet hath created them, and it is slie who delivereth 
 " (or, avengeth) their souls. I masturbated [to produce 
 " you], and I was content with the hundreds of thou- 
 " sands [of beings] who came forth from me in your 
 
 * Or, the wcejjinj
 
 THE GODS WHO GIVE LIFE 155 
 
 " name of Nehesu (i.e., Negroes) ; Horns made them to 
 "come into being, and it is he who avengeth their 
 "souls. I sought out mine Eye, and ye came into 
 being in your name of Themehu ; Sekhet hath created 
 " them, and she avengeth their souls." 
 
 The passage which refers to the gods who make 
 stable the period of life (Kheru-aiiau-em-Ament) 
 reads : — 
 
 Those who make firm (or, permanent) the duration 
 
 
 The Twelve Gods of Life in Ament. 
 
 of life stablish the days of the souls [in] Amenti and 
 possess the word (or, command) of the place of 
 destruction. Ea saith unto them : — " Inasmuch as ye 
 " are the gods who dwell in the Tuat, and who have 
 "possession of [the serpent] Meterui, by means of 
 " whom ye mete out the duration of life of the souls 
 "who are in Amenti who are condemned to destruc- 
 " tion, destroy ye the souls of the enemies according
 
 156 FIFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " to the place of destruction which ye are commanded 
 " to appoint, and let them not see the hidden 
 " place." 
 
 The passage in the text which refers to the divine 
 sovereign chiefs reads : — 
 
 " [Here are] the divine sovereign chiefs who shall 
 " destroy the enemies. They shall have their offerings 
 
 V^^ m -U <=> '*~T» Aww»* /'MMii 
 
 • *' ^ ^- •<»► Rr.*--'. 
 
 />*»WA .^tZ. \Jmm- 
 
 The Ei^ht Soverein-n Chiefs in the Tuat. 
 
 " by means of the word [which becometh] Maat ; they 
 " shall have tlieir oblations npon earth by means of the 
 " word [which becometh] MaJit, and it is they who 
 " destroy and who pass the edict concerning (literally, 
 " write) the duration of the life of the souls who dwell 
 " in Amenti. The destruction which is yours shall be 
 " [directed] against the enemies, and the power to write
 
 THE EIGHT SOVEREIGN CHIEFS I57 
 
 " which ye possess sliall lie for the place of destruction. 
 " I have come, even I the great one Horus, that I may 
 "make a reckoning with my body, and that I may 
 " shoot forth evils against my enemies. Their food is 
 " bread, and their drink is the tchcscrt wine, and they 
 "have cool water wherewith to refresh (or, bathe) 
 " themselves. [Offerings are made to them upon earth. 
 " One doth not enter into the place of destruction.] ^ 
 
 J Supplied from ChampoUiou, Noiicei^, p. 772.
 
 ( 158 ) 
 
 CHAPTEE VII. 
 THE JUDGMENT HALL OF OSIRIS. 
 
 The Sixth Division of the Tuat. 
 
 The boat of Ra having passed through the Fifth 
 Division of the Tuat arrives at the gateway which 
 leads to the Sixth Division, or, as the text says: 
 
 _A 1 W I <:II> I ^ I I ,WWV\ / .J ^ <:i AAAA/NA ' ' - ' I 
 
 " cometh forth to this pylon, and he passeth in through 
 " it, and those gods who are in the secret place acclaim 
 "him." The gateway is guarded by twelve bearded 
 mummy forms, who are described as the "gods and 
 
 goddesses who are in this pylon," \\\ ^^^^ ^^ '^ Pn ' 
 Hlr V' r J I ^ "^ ' ^^^ ^^ ^^ called Nebt-aha, 
 
 Y ^ . The gate which admits to the Sixth 
 
 Division resembles those already described; at the 
 entrance to the corridor and at its exit stands a 
 bearded mummied form, the former being called 
 
 Maa-A]!, ot^, and the latter Sheta-ab, ^, 
 
 These names mean " Eight (or, true) of heart " and
 
 THE JUDGMENT HALL OF OSIRIS 
 
 159 
 
 ilUlM^^S: mM5L-kMB^Mm\\^ 
 
 ail 
 
 in 
 
 
 m 
 
 ■ 
 
 'WWW 
 
 \ 
 
 T 
 
 
 Ittitliiitiiiiii^i 
 
 
 
 rmy 
 
 mmm 
 
 • • 
 
 ■I" 
 
 The Judgment Hall of Osiris. The Gate of the Serpent Set-em-moa-f.
 
 l6o SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 "Hidden of heart" respectively, and each is said to 
 extend his hands and arms to Ra. The corridor is 
 swept by flames. The gods who acclaim the god say, 
 " Come thou to us, thou who art at the head of the 
 " horizon, great god, who dost open the hidden place. 
 " Open thou the holy doors, and unfold the portals of 
 
 "the hidden place," --_fl ^__^ Pf", ffUl ^ \\ ^1 1 ll 
 
 \/ ^S ^^ "^^ 1 ^=*^ M U 1 1=^^^ nmnnr 
 
 I S lllllllll U I <d=> 11 I AW.AA liilMiJ I s 
 
 Between tlie gate which leads into the Sixth 
 Division and the Division itself we find inserted a 
 remarkable scene, which may be thus described: — 
 In the upper part, from one side to another, a line is 
 drawn, which is intended to represent the roof of the 
 shrine or canopy in wliich the god is seated, and on it 
 
 rests a row of kakheru v ^ (j ; i , i.e., spear-head 
 
 ornaments. From the inside of the roof hang, upside 
 down, four heads of some kind of horned animal. 
 
 These are called Hahaiu FD '^^ FD "^^ "^^ (1 fl i > 
 
 and are supposed to be heads of gazelle ^ or oxen. In 
 the space between the spear -head ornaments and the 
 side of the Tuat is written 
 
 TJ^T¥ 
 
 I I I 
 
 The transliteration of these characters appears to be 
 Ser her Tuat sath then ; the meaning of the first three 
 
 1 " Tetes de gazelles" (Cliamiiollion, Monuments, torn, ii., p. 495).
 
 THE JUDGMENT HALL OF OSIRIS l6l 
 
 words is tolerably clear, i.e., " Osiris, governor of the 
 Tuat," but the signification of the last signs is doul)tful. 
 M. Lefebure translates the inscription, " Osiris, master 
 of Hades, Earth, and Tanen." Osiris, who wears the 
 double crown of the Suutli and North, and holds in his 
 right hand the symbol of " life," and in his left a sceptre, 
 
 L is seated on a chair of state, which is set on the top 
 
 of a platform with nine steps. On each step stands a 
 god, and the nine gods are described as the " company 
 
 which is with Sai;, i.e., Osiris," ^ i (^ - - c^ ^ %, 
 
 On the topmost step is a Balance, in which the actions 
 of the deceased are weighed ; the beam of the Balance 
 is supported cither by the deceased, or by a stand 
 which is made in the form of a bearded munnny. One 
 pan of the Balance contains some rectangular object, 
 and the other a figure' of the bird which is symbolic 
 of evil and wickedness. Behind the IJalance is a boat, 
 which is sailing away from the presence of Osiris ; in 
 it is a pig being driven along by a dog-headed ape 
 which nourishes a stick. In the top left-hand corner 
 is a figure of Anubis, jackal-headed, and under the 
 fioor of the platform on wliicli Osiris is seated are 
 figures of the enemy of Sar, or Osiris. From the 
 variant of this scene which is found on the sarco- 
 phagus of Tchehra at Baris,^ as well as from the 
 sarcophagus of Seti I., we may see that the pig in the 
 
 ^ Sharp, Inscri;ptions, xaart ii., pi. 0. 
 VOL. II. M
 
 l62 SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 boat is called Am-a, 7 a, i.e., "Eater of the Arm," 
 
 and the boat is piloted by a second ape which stands 
 in the bows. On the Paris monument we see a man 
 wielding a hatchet in a threatening manner and 
 standing near tlie Scales, probably with the view of 
 destroying the deceased if the judgment of Osiris 
 prove adverse to him. 
 
 The nine short lines of text at the foot of the scene 
 read : — 
 ® o 111 m /C\ 2^-=^ q I o ^ i -? ''=u) 
 
 => O W I III fl\ _^ I IB^ ® s=5 W 
 
 1-9 - ■ n m o- 
 I I I J&*"" ^^1 ^^^s^lll 
 
 TV^i^iTV 
 
 This inscription is in the so-called " enigmatic " 
 writing,^ a fact which was first noticed by ChampoUion, 
 but a transcrij)t of it exists on the sarcophagus of 
 Tchehra in characters which have the ordinary values,- 
 and this reads as follows : — 
 
 ^111 (i) J[m. I c=i=;=. I .<s>- o ci ^ ^.^^.^^ I A il ^^ii:=ir www 
 
 1 See (jioodwin, Aeg. Zcit., 1873, p. 138; llcuoiif, ibid., 187-1, p. 101 ; 
 and ChampoUion, Monuments, pi. 272. 
 
 ^ Lefebure renders, " O yc who briny the word just or false to 
 nie, he, Thoth, examines the words" {llecords of the Fast, vol. x., 
 p. 111).
 
 THE JUDGMENT HALL OF OSIRIS 163 
 
 rvi~i o> — «-- . 
 5=> >,^ ™^ , I.e., " His enemies are under his 
 
 " feet, the gods and the spirits are before him ; he is 
 " the enemy of the dead (i.e., the damned) among the 
 "beings of the Tuat, Osiris putteth under restraint 
 " [his] enemies, he destroyetli them, and he pcrformeth 
 " the slaughter of them." 
 
 The text which refers to Anubis reads : — 
 
 and this Mr. Goodwin transcribed : — 
 
 I i I 
 
 l| ^_ ^ *^^-, i.e., "Hail, ye who make to be madt 
 
 "the word of your little one, may Thoth weigh the 
 " words, may he make to eat his father." 
 
 Immediately over the boat is the short inscription : — 
 
 This Goodwin renders by, " [When] this god entereth, 
 " he (i.e., the Ape) riseth and putteth under restraint 
 " Am-a (i.e., the Eater of the Arm)." i 
 
 1 " The diver [when] tliis yoil rises, he gives up [the pig] to the 
 plagues" (Let'ebui-e, op. cit., p. 114J.
 
 164 SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 Behind the })air of scales is the following legend ^ : — 
 This ]\Ir. Goodwin transcribes by : — 
 
 A/WWN CT^ 1 AAAAAA 0^^ Zl 7i -B^ © '^ ^.=^ I A J] ^^Li^^ 
 
 |_.^D ^^=. [j^ Ji^^^]! 
 
 I /vvvvv» — ' ■ ^ I J^ 
 
 I O \1. AA/VWA t* 'J AAAAAA *^^^ ^ U ^^ U I T 
 
 7^e'"(l^/^'?^y^ ® '^, and renders, 
 
 " The Ijalance-bearer does homage ; the blessed spirits 
 " in Amenti follow after him ; the morning star 
 " disperses the thick darkness ; there is good will 
 " above, justice below. The god reposes himself, he 
 " gives bread to the blessed, who throng towards him." 
 The translation by M. Lefebure reads, " The bearer of 
 " the hatchet and the bearer of the scales protect the 
 " inhaljitant of Amenti, [who] takes his repose in 
 " Hades, and traverses tlie darkness and the shadows. 
 " Happiness is above, and justice below. The god 
 " reposes and sheds light produced by truth which he 
 " has produced." 
 
 ' See also CluuuiiuUiou, Monuments, torn, ii., p. 490.
 
 THE JUDGMENT HALL OF OSIRIS 165 
 
 The upper part of the space between the roof and 
 the platform on which Osiris sits is occupied l)y two 
 short inscriptions, which are full of difficulty ; they 
 read : — 
 
 j=s [ I i " ' "" 1 r\/^r\r^f^ 
 
 ^^>- ! 
 
 
 
 1 * SIt!^'^!! 
 f A- 
 
 The meaning of these texts has puzzled several 
 workers, and even the order in which the characters 
 are to be read has given rise to differences of opinion. 
 One of the chief difficulties in the matter is caused 
 by the way in which the two legends are written 
 on the sarcophagus of Seti I. Looking at the 
 hieroglyphics as they stand, they seem to form one 
 continuous inscription, but, if we examine the scene as 
 it appears in the tomb of Rameses II., we see that we 
 must divide them as above. Mr. Goodwin made an
 
 l66 SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 attempt to transcrilie and translate a part of the texts, 
 but as he considered them to form only one inscription 
 we cannot accept his rendering. M. Lefebure has made 
 translations of both texts, and they read ^ : — 
 
 I. " They, they hide those which are in the state of 
 " the elect. They the country [belonging] to them, is 
 " Ameh in the land. ]^)ehold, these are they whose 
 " heads issue. AYhat a mystery is their appearance, 
 " [tlie appearance] of your images ! " 
 
 II. " The examination of the words takes place, and 
 " he strikes down wickedness, he who has a just heart, 
 " he who bears the words in the scales, in the divine 
 " place of the examination of the mystery of mysteries 
 " of the spirits. The god who rises has made his 
 " infernal [companions] all." 
 
 For purposes of comparison, the versions of the texts 
 from the tomb of Eameses VI., as given by Champollion 
 {Monuments, pi. 252) are given. It will l)e noted that 
 a part of the line immediately over the head of Osiris, 
 
 ^^ ^ Q M /wvAAA ^^ ^ is given in different 
 
 places in the latter scene, for aX^ ^ is immedi- 
 ately in front of the double crown of Osiris, and 
 
 rV A5\ ^*=:>- '^'^^'^ is immediately in front of the 
 H l/m 111 ^ 
 
 sceptre of the god. The other lines read: — 
 ' Hecordis of tlie Past, vol. x., p. 11-1. 
 
 >(?)
 
 THE JUDGMENT HALL OF OSIRIS 167 
 
 II. ^"^^ ® %^ I ^^=^~>. ^^ '^^n 1^ "^ ^^ '^''•^ 
 
 AAA^VV\ /I I III _/-l _Ol\S I 1 1 /wvw\ _/_i 
 
 ("=0) 
 
 o
 
 ( i68 ) 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 THE GATE OF SET-EM-MAAT-F. 
 
 The Sixth Division of the Tuat — continued. 
 
 The pylon which gives access to the Sixth Division 
 of the Tuat has already been described. The monster 
 serpent wliich stands on his tail and guards the gate- 
 way is called Set-em-maat-f, I ^ [l , and the 
 
 two lines of text which refer to his admission of Ra 
 read : — 
 
 " He who is over this door openeth to Ra. Sa 
 "saith to Set-em-maat-f: — 'Open thy gate to Ra, 
 " unfold thy doors to Khuti, that he may send light 
 " into the thick darkness, and may make his radiance 
 "illumine the hidden habitation.' This door is shut 
 " after this great god hath passed through it, and there 
 " is lamentation to those who are in this gateway when 
 " they hear this door close upon them " (see p. 169). 
 
 rf--b I I D /wwyv ^ > — ■■ 
 
 jT I /srvw^ II I IIIIII AV\/\/v\ U 
 
 n tx^^i^ - " " -=^^3^ 1^ II I " ^^ 
 
 uumiJ I I /wsAAA O I lli I \\- I I www ^ \\ 
 
 Pi\^^Mi:i:^k^era 
 
 ^c=^
 
 8(1V 
 
 FRAGMENTARY TEXTS OF SETI I. 
 
 169 
 
 I D 
 
 J\ A J\ 
 
 1 
 
 in -^ 
 
 \^\\\rA 
 
 4 
 
 1 1 1 
 
 ra 
 
 iiiimrr 
 A I D. 
 
 The scenes and texts which ilhis- 
 trate the Sixth Di\dsion of the 
 Tuat cannot be obtained in a com- 
 plete state from the sarcophagus of 
 Seti I., and recourse must therefore 
 be had to other documents. In 
 the following pages, however, the 
 fragments of the texts and scenes 
 from the sarcophagus are first given, 
 and these are followed by the com- 
 plete texts as they are found in the 
 tomb of Rameses VI., as published 
 by Monsieur E. Lef ebure in the third 
 volume of the Mi' moires of the French 
 Archneological Mission at Cairo. 
 
 The fragmentary texts and scenes 
 from the sarcophagus of Seti I. may 
 be thus descriljed : — 
 
 In the middle register are : — 
 
 1. Two of the four gods of the 
 Tuat whose duty it is to tow along 
 the boat of the Sun through this 
 Division. 
 
 '^^ Sp 
 
 
 ^ I 
 
 
 L2li 
 
 
 
 The Serpent Set-em-maat-f,
 
 lyO SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 2. The god Te^i, , in the form of an aged man, 
 
 with l)ent shoulders, and leaning on a staff. 
 
 3. The iackal-headcd standard called Ea, 1 a , 
 
 to which are tied two " enemies," who probably repre- 
 sent the dannied. 
 
 4. The two Utciiats, ^^^^, which appear to be 
 keeping watch on the " enemies." 
 
 5. The I'ackal-headed standard called Tem, ^ , 
 
 ' ■ an II 
 
 with two " enemies " tied to it. 
 
 G. A nmmmied form, with projecting elbows, called 
 
 Afat, "^K^ ^ . 
 
 7. The jackal-headed standard called Kheper, 
 
 M ^^'^ ^"^^^^^ ^^^° " enemies " tied to it. 
 
 8. A mummied form, with projecting elbows, called 
 T....A,^||j(],orMET,g.' 
 
 9. The jackal-headed standard called Siiu, () ^ rjj ? 
 with two " enemies " tied to it. 
 
 10. A mummied form, with projecting elbows, called 
 
 — H — r 
 
 Sent, ^'•^'^^ • . 
 
 11. The jackal-headed standard called Seb, "^^ J ^jj, 
 with two " enemies " tied to it. 
 
 12. A mummied form, with projecting elbows, called 
 
 Aqa-sa, 
 
 1 The names arc siiiiplicd from Champollioii, Notices, p. 502.
 
 FRAGMENTARY TEXTS OF SETI I. 171 
 
 13. The jackal-headed standard called Sar, ^ ^ 
 (Osiris).i 
 
 14. A imimiiiied form, with projecting elbows, called 
 Aa-khei;(?), ^"^ /i\(?)/ 
 
 15. The jackal -headed standard called Heru, vs. . 
 
 IG. A god holding a sceptre called SiiEF-HRA, <^. 
 
 The text which refers to the above-mentioned fjods 
 reads: — 
 
 1L°21Vnii^^^^1 
 
 — *— — (D— — «— <=> 
 
 I I I 7\ I I I O I 
 
 
 ' The names are supplied from Champollion, Notices, p. 502. 
 Champollion's text reads : <cr> [J \J 
 
 4 I AAA^^W -Jj 
 
 Ji 
 
 
 /"/^^yvv ^ {Notices, torn, ii., p. 503).
 
 172 
 
 SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT
 
 THE HARVEST IN THE KINGDOM OF OSIRIS I73 
 
 
 ^^\A 
 
 U-lu I 
 
 ^L^^ 
 
 rii5; 
 
 
 
 
 ■.«2 .rid
 
 174 
 
 I 
 
 IT^^V 
 
 
 AA/^^A AAAAAA 
 
 SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 I I LI ^ /y ' '— ' /VvAAAA I W \^ 
 
 /V^V>AA r~r>AAyv\ I V« -J> I I ' I -~ — "^^ ^*-'- 
 
 D ^ 
 
 I I I 
 
 n 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 n^^^^n 
 
 5CX 
 
 I I I 
 
 -^ ^ H O 
 
 D 
 
 =■111 ^ 
 
 - I 1 I 
 
 Hi' 
 
 " [This great god is towed along by the gods in the 
 " Tuat, and those who tow Ea along say, ' Rise np, 
 
 " disk,] god, verily get thee forth to 
 
 " the standards of Seb.' Tern saith unto the standards : — 
 " ' Keep ward over the enemies, and bind ye fast those 
 " who shall be smitten. ye gods who are behind the 
 " standards, and who are in the following of Seb, I give 
 " ye the power to bind fast the enemies and to keep 
 " ward over the wicked. Let them not go forth from 
 " under your hands, let them not slip through your 
 " fingers. enemies, ye arc reckoned for slaughter 
 "according to the decree which [was given] to you by 
 
 " him that with his body, and created the Tuat 
 
 "by his members (?). He hath passed the decree for
 
 THE HARVEST IN THE KINGDOM OF OSIRIS I75 
 
 " you to be punished, and he taketh count of you and 
 " what ye do ' " 
 
 The upper register is much mutilated on the cover 
 of the sarcophagus of Seti I. ; on it we see : — 
 
 1. Fi\-e upright male figures, each of whom holds a 
 large loaf of bread, ^ , with both hands on his head ; 
 when the scene was complete these figures were twelve 
 in number, as we learn from the variants published by 
 Champollion,^ and they are called Hetepti-khepeiiu, 
 
 im^w- 
 
 ^ jm Hi I 
 
 2. Six upright male figures, each of whom holds the 
 feather of Maat with both hands on his head ; when 
 the scene was complete these figures were twelve in 
 number, and they are called Autu-maamu-kheru- 
 
 The text which remains reads : — 
 
 n^%.^^n?r.wmm 
 
 <=. I 
 
 /wv/vv\ 
 
 I I I 
 
 11 
 
 Di I Mi 
 
 ^ I I I 
 
 AAAA^V\ 1 I I 
 
 111©^ 
 
 W III 
 
 Q^^^i.^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 M I 
 
 • Notices, ii., p. 501. 
 
 " Supplied from Chaiapolliou, Notices, ii., p. 502.
 
 SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 176 
 
 "T" \/ ^ /wwv\ v-A "in \/ 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 itlllli 1 " '' 
 
 AAAAAA 
 AAAAAA 
 AAAAAA 1 
 
 " [These arc they who have offered up incense to the 
 
 Fragnicut of the Cover of the Sarcophagus of Seti I. in the British Museum. 
 
 " gods, and whose doubles liave been washed, -c2>- ^ 1 
 
 l—l n AAAAAA r\ c3 I r/VW^ Jf^O -fX AAAAAA AAAAAA H "l 
 
 " iyis=^Or f\\,r;^ u — 
 
 I ± <^z=>\\\ llll I I if J Jf I I M I I I I ij 
 " niafit, they have been reckoned up and they are maat
 
 THE HARVEST IN THE KINGDOM OF OSIRIS 177 
 
 "in the presence of the gi'eat god, who destroyeth 
 " iniquities. Osiris saith unto them : — ' Ye are madt of 
 " madt. Tie ye at peace [because of what] ye have 
 "done, ye who are in the forms of those wlio are 
 " in my following, and who dwell in the house of him 
 
 " whose souls are holy. Live ye on what ye live 
 
 " there, and have the mastery 
 " over the cool waters which 
 
 " are in your Lake '" 
 
 A few years ago I pur- 
 chased from a native at Luxor 
 a fragment of the cover of 
 the sarcophagus of Seti I. (see 
 p. 176); this is now in the 
 IJritish Museum (No. 29,948), 
 and it gives the following : — 
 
 1. Three male figures, each 
 of which bears a loaf on his 
 head. 
 
 2. The followino; fragment- 
 
 ary text: 
 
 I I I I 
 
 u 
 
 I I I I II 
 
 I I I 
 
 ^ (2 I 
 
 mpj 
 
 n \ \ \ \ \ \ A Ji 
 I I I 
 
 cr^ 
 
 ,1 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 I S=J-^^ 
 
 II I I Ml D 
 
 I III 
 
 mm 
 
 V i^#^, "Their bread cakes are ordered for 
 
 VOL. II.
 
 178 SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " them by their gods ; their han are in their hands, 
 " and they enter into their abodes at the pylon which 
 " destroyeth its gods. The god Sar (Osiris) saith unto 
 " them : — ' Your bread shall be to you from that which 
 " cometh forth from your mouths, ye Hetepti- 
 
 "KHEPERU '" 
 
 In the lower register are : — 
 
 1. Five male figures, who are occupied in tending 
 very large ears of corn ; when the scene was complete 
 these figures were twelve in number, and they were 
 called, " Those who work about the plants of grain in 
 
 " the fields of the Tuat," [^ 1^1 ^ j ^ ^ ^] 
 
 _BJ^ °^ 'C)t.t) _B^ iM^ \> I LTZD * 
 
 2. A man holding a sickle ; he is one of the seven 
 
 " reapers," ^'^ "^ J ^ p^, of which this 
 
 section of the scene originally consisted. 
 
 The text which relates to those who tend the grain 
 reads : — 
 
 ucs>- U ^ ^ ^^^ ""**"" " ~~**~ '"■'^"'^ 
 
 AA/VW\ 
 
 .1 I I 
 
 /WNAAA Q 
 
 ^ , .www ,^^==3 (^^ v\ /I\ ^-^ 7r <^~~=> ^ — 
 
 /••^ I I I 1 1 H jr ^ Jr In I ^ ^ 
 
 □ ^ V.WVWS M 1,1 ^/^ ^ m (s^ ,,,,^ 
 
 Ji^^,^ I I I 1 1 '^'wvAA -^:z::7 ^ (o ill Jj Q.Q.Q. 
 
 I I I I I 1^ 
 
 V\ (^^^^ ...O £==3 .^^ 1 s:r=i 'wwv^ ^-,1 
 
 W.WX I w I 1 1 1 I I 0^ 1 1 1 I O 1 511 J 
 
 The passage iu brackets is from ChampolHou, Notices, ii., p. 503.
 
 WW 
 
 MM 
 
 THE HARVEST IN THE KINGDOM OF OSIRIS 179 
 
 m^. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^'^\¥'^^^\Mr>^M 
 
 \i^ 
 
 M <i plil, H HP/ 'VWVV\ ^-s 
 
 iii^oooiinWiMi 
 
 I _M^ U t Jr X ^(?) ^ Jr I I I I I I J^ ^000 
 
 0.1^ 
 
 ^=0= 
 
 ^ III I I I 
 
 <rr> -^^ I 
 
 I r^rsNsrsf\ — h — 
 
 I /-Al^AAA 1 I I 
 
 ^ 
 
 AATWVA AWVNA W ■'• \^' 
 
 ^^ fl I I I I I H 
 
 Shi 
 
 ...Q I 
 
 -k^^. 
 
 \ 
 
 , — *• — QQQ I 
 
 "^^^^ I I I .••■■ I 
 
 ^ I — "— 
 
 i?^f^^ III! 
 
 I II I 
 
 n /www 
 
 I I I 1 M il 
 
 •^ 
 
 [J^r>. 
 
 I I I I 
 
 I I ' t 1 I .'" II II /WWW 
 
 ^^ 
 
 /\A/WW 
 I I I 
 
 ii 
 
 iii I III 1^ DM liMfllfl 
 
 zd ^ o 
 
 ^ w 
 
 I crzD 
 
 /WVvAA 
 
 ni.Jii^i
 
 l80 SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 AAAAAA ^^111 *=^ _ 1 |\; AAAAA^ 
 
 I I I I I I ^ ^ I 1 A ^ 111 /=Z=Z <=^ O I 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 — M — ra NMMsNx r\ ^ ? > — H — e^ ^===> EL m <-^ ' 
 
 1 I l_M^ AA/VWV 1 Jl Q I 1 I 1 I S_S^<I=> h 
 
 " [They perform the works in connection with the 
 "grain, and they embrace the god of wheat (Nepra) 
 " which is eaten (?). Their grain becometh glorious in 
 " the land through the light of Ea, when he appeareth, 
 " and sendeth forth heat, and maketh his way by them. 
 " The lord of joy of heart saith unto them : — ' Let your 
 "grain be glorious, and let the young shoots of your 
 "grain germinate, and let your offerings be for Ea] 
 " . . . . there .... Ea. Let Neper germinate, and 
 " let Sar (Osiris) be the source of food of the gods in 
 
 "the Tuat Amenti .... behold, in the 
 
 " fields of the Tuat.' They gather together their grain, 
 " and they say unto Ea : — ' Let the fields of the Tuat be 
 "green with young plants. May Ea shine upon the 
 " members of Sar (Osiris). When thou dost shine the 
 "young plants come into being, great god, thou 
 " creator of the grain.' Their offerings of food are of 
 "grain, and their drink offerings are of tcheser, and 
 " their libations arc made with cool water. Offerings 
 " are made unto them on the earth of the grain of the 
 " fields of the Tuat." 
 
 1 The words in brackets are supplied from Chaui])olliou, Notices, 
 ii., p. 503.
 
 THE REAPERS IN THE KINGDOM OF OSIRIS l8l 
 
 Of the reapers it is said : — 
 
 " These are they who have their scythes, and who 
 " reap the grain in their fiekls. Ka saith to them : — 
 " * Take ye your seythes, and reap ye your grain, for it 
 
 " is granted to you your habitations, and to 
 
 "join yourselves [to] me in the Circle of the Hidden 
 " Forms. Hail to you, ye reapers ! ' Their food is of 
 " bread, and their drink is of tcheser, and their libations 
 " are made with cool water. Offerings are made unto 
 " them upon earth as being those who hold scythes in 
 " the fields of the Tuat." 
 
 The text which describes the middle register of the 
 Sixth Division as it appears in the tomb of Rameses VI. 
 reads : — 
 
 T1 
 
 I P] AAAA/V\ 
 
 
 -e- 
 
 AA/WV\ 
 
 A I 1 I O 
 
 
 i /WW\A cq I p) n 
 
 •<2::- I I I I I I i I I _Hi^ .^^ 
 
 o 
 
 ? 
 
 €\ ; 
 
 \ \ \ J\ 
 
 V1 
 
 -J! ^ I 
 
 MH 
 
 a '^ 
 
 I I I 
 
 ^ k3 I ® ^ 
 
 ^^mkf^qv-^n
 
 l82 SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 1:¥JI 
 
 ?^1 
 
 \:^^^:%lMl/^±^ 
 
 h^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 -A^^\ 
 
 II I AAAAAA 
 I I I I I 
 
 A^A/V\A AAAAAA 
 
 I I 
 
 I - 
 
 I ^ <=> 
 
 I I I AAAAAA 
 AAAAA^ I I I 
 
 AAA/V\A 
 
 I I I 
 
 AA/V\AA 
 
 O 
 
 AAAAAA, AAAAAA 
 
 D ^ 
 
 I ^ ' ' " 
 
 I Jj^ AAAAW\ 
 
 mrTi<^:=> 
 
 o 
 
 kl 
 
 I I 1 1 I 
 
 \X^X /VsAAAA 
 
 I AVvWV 
 
 x^ — »— 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 — l*i , AAAAAA 
 
 s 
 
 AA^^AA 
 
 I I I 
 
 fl ci 
 
 o 
 
 ^m 
 
 I <^ 
 III I 
 
 J^ 
 
 -<2>- 
 
 r^ I ill 
 
 
 I 1 i^^^'^mol^^z:^ 
 
 "This great god is lieiiig towed along hy tlie gods of 
 " the Tuat, and those who tow Ha along say : — ' Be
 
 THE FETTERING OF THE WICKED 183 
 
 " exalted, Aten (i.e., Disk), who art at the head of 
 
 " the Light, the head .... Look ye at the 
 
 "abodes of the Tuat. Your eyes are to you, gods, 
 " observe ye Ka, the Power in Akert. This great god 
 " decreeth your destinies. This great god cometh forth 
 " to the standards of Seb, which reckon up the enemies 
 " after the weighing of words in Anientet. Behold, Sa 
 "saith unto this god [when] he cometh forth to the 
 
 "standards of Seb the head 'of Ea, the great 
 
 " god .... verily, get thee forth to the standards of 
 "Seb. Teni saith unto the standards: — 'Keep ward 
 " over the enemies, and bind ye fast those who are to 
 " be smitten. ye gods who are in tlie following of 
 " the standards, and who are in the following of Seb, I 
 " give ye power to bind fast the enemies, and to keep 
 " ward over the wicked (or, those who are to be 
 " smitten). Let them not come forth from under your 
 " hands, let them not slip tlirough your fingers. ye 
 " enemies, ye are doomed to slaughter, according to the 
 " decree of Ea concerning you. His person is the body 
 " of Akert, and he hath created the Tuat of his frame- 
 " work. He hath issued the decree for you to be put 
 " into restraint, he hath ordered your doom which shall 
 
 " be wrought upon }'uu in the great hall of Ea 
 
 " the gods weep [and] lament, he settcth the gods 
 " to ward you, and the enemies and those who are to 
 " be smitten in the Tuat are condemned to these 
 " standards.' " 
 
 In the upper register are twelve gods, each of whom
 
 184 SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 stands upright, and has the feather of Maiit on his 
 head, and twelve gods, each of whom stands upright, 
 and has a large loaf on his head. These gods are de- 
 scribed as " Maati gods bearing Maat," ^^ <^^ ' ' (r?) ' 
 ^ Vi» I S^ p ^ , and the " Heteptiu gods bear- 
 
 i„g provlions." f^^s^|J.^i<>-^i. 
 The text reads : — 
 
 I 
 
 ^111 I i -^z^ III I III I 1 I f J S' '.Zr I U 
 
 t Jl I /^-S^ JF I A ^^.-^ -B^ ^ 1 111 ^^-^ I 1 
 
 ^ I I I I I I <=> gih I I I III I M I I I I I 
 
 /VVWV\ 
 
 '^'-^^'^ ;7:^;;aa I I I 
 
 j\\ \ w \ \ A J\ <=> 
 
 =:> ^ I llM III <=l^^ (^3) II M I II 
 
 I III 
 
 II I I 1 I I □ Jl I 
 
 AAAAA^ , . o ^ Cl ° S / I <*— — S n W^^AAA /VvAA^A 
 
 III -^-^IM^DMlOllllll^llimi 
 
 I 1 |2^^>_Jlllll I M I h I I c^^ Jll I l^=(^3)i 
 
 X^ll I l_^<=>=0=| J i)(.wwvvl I I J^ .ww^^ H .if 
 Jl ?===> /wwv^ I I I I f C^D _B^ 1 

 
 THE REWARD OF THE BLESSED 
 
 185 
 
 r\m 
 
 I I I I I S 
 
 Q^^;^TiJ 
 
 
 r^\/\A/\/\ t — Ai — 1 
 
 1 ^^ I I I - fl r I U 
 
 SQc^fTk^-P, 
 
 r=i3) 
 
 :nisp 
 
 ^^nmr 
 
 5^ 
 
 I I 
 
 I ^ D MM 
 
 IVrfiJIf^^PI 
 
 /VV^vV^A 
 
 I I 1 Ji^^ 
 
 1M^ 
 
 I ^ c^ 
 
 1 
 
 ^ W 
 
 W^ 
 
 I I I 
 
 f 
 
 I I I I I I 
 
 A 
 
 A 1 I I 
 
 r\hhl\l^ N\N\N\ 
 
 1 I 1 rv^/w\ 
 
 a 
 
 ffi sS^ 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 1 1 I ^ w 
 
 !^. =0=1111 I im4D=o=' 
 
 /VWJV^ —H 
 
 /WNAAA /VV^A^A 
 
 AAAAAA H 
 
 ,vw^S Jr s a I I 1 J^ I I S P 
 
 I H [IIIJ 
 
 " Otl'ering.s of incense to their gods, libations of cool 
 " water to their douljles, and fillings of the mouth 
 
 " by his sustenance afterwards by their offer- 
 
 "ings of drink and their otierings of bread. Come
 
 l86 SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " forth to them their gods and their doubles. Their 
 " hands are to them, and they go to their cakes 
 
 " through the pylon of and to its gods. Sar 
 
 " saith unto them : — ' Your bread is to you, [according 
 " to] your utterances, and the peace cakes of Kheper, 
 " and loaves of bread. Ye shall have the mastery over 
 "your legs, and ye shall have satisfaction in your 
 "hearts, and your gods shall present unto you your 
 " Mienfit cakes and unto your doubles their provisions, 
 " which consist of bread, and their drink, which shall 
 " be of tclicser ale, and their libations shall be of cool 
 " water, and offerings shall be made unto them upon 
 " earth as the lord[s] of offerings in Amentet. For 
 " they have done what was right whilst they were 
 " upon earth, and they have fought on behalf of their 
 " god, and they shall he called to the enjoyment of the 
 " land of the House of Life with madt. That which 
 "is theirs by right shall be allotted to them in the 
 "presence of the Great God, who doeth away iniquity.' 
 " Then shall Osiris say unto them : — ' Madt be to you, 
 " ye Maat gods, and peace be unto you by reason of 
 " what ye have done in following after me, dwellers 
 " in the House, the soul of which is holy. Ye shall 
 " live your life upon that whereupon those who live 
 " there feed, and ye shall have dominion over the cool 
 " waters of your land. I have decreed for you that ye 
 " shall have your being in all of it with madt, and 
 " witliout sin (or, defects).' Their bread ',shall be maat 
 "cakes, their drink sliall be of wine, and their liljations
 
 THE HARVEST IN THE KINGDOM OF OSIRIS 1S7 
 
 "shall be of cool water. And there shall be offered 
 "unto them upon earth the offerings which must be 
 " made from their land." 
 
 In the lower register are the figures of twelve men, 
 each of whom tends a monster ear of corn (?), or a tree, 
 under the superintendence of a god who leans on a 
 staff, and a group of reapers, each holding a sickle. 
 The text, which is nnitilated in places, reads : — 
 
 000 
 
 A/VWV\ AA/WVv^^^^ r^ O AAAAAA Q Y •' 
 
 111^ AAAAAA I I |^^%^y" o I 1 I c:^::^ ^ /v^^^ olw o 
 
 AAAA/V\ ^ D I AAAAW , //f AA/WV\ /^N ' '^'^'^'^ H h ^ , , O U 
 
 U t/vv\^^ 
 
 I 1 I 1 I I 1 I I C) '' I I I (^ I M 1 Q 111^ 
 
 qoQ^ ° ^ ZJ 7;:^^ \=J^ ^
 
 i88 
 
 SIXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 A/W^A I I I 
 
 AA/V^A 
 A^AAAA 
 
 •k^^ 
 
 I I 
 
 
 .^1 
 
 I I I 
 
 J^ 
 
 ^' 
 
 — » — qriQ o 
 
 o 
 
 '"'ill 
 
 ^^Jl 
 
 AAA/V\A 
 AAAAAA I I 
 
 4 g^^ QQQ O 
 
 AAAAAA 
 AAV^VN I 1 I 
 
 '•yy-y^ AAAA^\ ' " i AAAAAA ^ k 
 
 "ill I II I 1^ Di I ifilil 
 
 AW^ / 
 
 ^ W o o 
 
 
 ^\ AAAAAA 
 
 qyiraqraiiqi^n^jqUJ 
 
 iratjra 
 
 iii 
 
 A/^WVS 
 I I I 
 
 1^ 
 
 AAAAAA AAAAAA 
 
 ^ III 
 
 A/VV\AA 
 
 I I I 
 
 
 AA/V^A^ M^— 
 
 AWW\ AAAA/V\ 
 AAAAAA 1 I 
 
 S 
 
 ^n^J^ 
 
 n1 n1 m nln I n 
 
 ^ 
 
 "They perform their work in connection with the 
 "grain, and they embrace (i.e., cultivate) the divine 
 "grain (or, Nepiia), and the spirits feed upon their 
 "grain in the land of the god of light (Kiiu), who 
 " cometh forth and passeth by them, and [Neb-aut-ab, 
 
 " "^37 a\ "O", i.e., the Lord of iov of heart, saith unto 
 
 " them : — ' Let yuur grain be glorious], and let your ears 
 " of wheat germinate, and let your offerings be for Ka. 
 " Your hhenfu cakes are in the Tuat, your offerings are 
 " to you, the offerings which are yours by madt are
 
 THE REAPERS IN THE KINGDOM OF OSIRIS 189 
 
 " decreed (?) for you. Herbs among you. 
 
 " Sar germinate ' and they say unto 
 
 " Ea : — ' Let plants spring up in the Fields of the Tuat, 
 " and let Ea shine upon the members of Sar. When 
 " thou dost shine the young plants come into being, 
 " great god, thou creator of the Egg.' Their food 
 " offerings are of grain, their drink is of tcheser ale, and 
 " their libations are made with cool water. Offerings 
 " are made unto them upon earth of the grain from the 
 " Fields of the Tuat." 
 
 Of the reapers it is said : — 
 
 "These are they who have their sickles and who 
 " reap the grain in their Field. Ea, saith unto them : — 
 " ' Take ye your sickles, and reap ye your grain, for it is 
 
 " gi-anted unto you your habitations, and to 
 
 "join yourselves to the Circle of the Hidden of Forms. 
 " Hail to you, ye reapers ! ' Their food is of bread- 
 " cakes, and their drink is of tcheser ale, and their 
 "libations are made with cool water. Offerings are 
 " made unto them upon earth as being those who reap 
 " the crrain in the Fields of the Tuat."
 
 ( igo ) 
 
 CHAPTEE IX. 
 THE OATE OF AKHA-EN-MAAT. 
 
 The Seventh Division of the Tuat. 
 
 The boat of the Sun having passed through the Sixth 
 Division of the Tuat arrives at the gateway which 
 leads to the Seventh Division. This gateway is 
 similar to that which guards the Sixth Division, and 
 is guarded by nine gods, who are described as the 
 
 "Seventh Company," ^ iii ; at the entrance to the 
 
 corridor, and at its exit, stands a bearded god, witli 
 
 arms hidden, the former being called SiiEPi, 
 
 and the latter Heqes(?), , and each is said to 
 
 H 
 
 extend his arms and liands to Rfi. The "corridor is 
 swept by flames of fire as before. The gateway is 
 
 called Pestit, — »— (J (j ^ , and the text says, " This 
 
 "great god cometh to this gateway, and entereth in 
 " through it, and the gods who are therein acclaim him," 
 
 
 Eii^^sivmii^ik^^ 
 
 H
 
 THE SERPENT AKHA-EN-MAAT IQI 
 
 . Part of the text of the speecli wliich the nine 
 
 gods make to Ea is broken away, hut what remains 
 reads, " Open the secret places, open tlie holy pylons, 
 
 " and unfold the hidden portals," 1 1 \Jf ==- ^^ ^^z:^ 
 
 ^ © n UTZJ ^^ nn ^ ■Z::::^. ^^ ^^^^ xhe monster 
 ^ JJ I I I T ^ 1 1 1 [ZS31 -nminr === 
 
 serpent which stands on his tail and guards the gate- 
 
 way is called Akiia-ex-maat, ^_-=> , and the two 
 
 lines of text which refer to his admission of Ea read, 
 " He who is over this door openeth to Ea. Sa saith to 
 " Akha-ex-maat ^ : — ' Open thy gate to Ea, unfold thy 
 " doors to Khuti, that he may send light into the 
 " thick darkness and may make his radiance illumine 
 " the hidden habitation.' This door is shut after the great 
 " god hath passed through it, and there is lamentation 
 " to those who are in this gateway when they hear this 
 "door close upon them." A portion of the text is 
 mutilated, but it can be restored with certainty." 
 
 In the middle of this Division we see the boat of Ea 
 being towed on its way by four gods of the Tuat ; the 
 god is in the same form as before, and stands in a shrine 
 enveloped l^y Mehen. Sa stands in the bows and Heka 
 at the stern. The text relating to the god reads : — 
 
 ijL:zm^'Amr.s-^\^ 
 
 • Var., ° 'f 1§IXj Akha-hrA. 
 
 - See Lelebure, Memoires, torn, ii., part ii., \A. 11 ff.
 
 ig2 
 
 SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 ^^G 
 
 |>^;>^! 
 
 4^}\\-4&:M'mm 
 
 
 rM^Ziliu ^h*US.'l>M> 
 
 

 
 VOL. II.
 
 194 
 
 ,1 
 
 SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 A/VVW\ 
 
 0^11 
 
 \i\:zn 
 
 111 
 
 
 A^^vVNA A/VN^/SA 
 
 A^A/W\ P \A 
 
 I I I Jl 
 
 1^ 
 
 I I I O I ru j:i^^^i I I 
 j\ III - 
 
 AAAAAA K. 
 
 1 I iw Jl m 
 
 /n 
 
 >*c crzn 
 
 
 ^^S^ ^ ^ 
 
 The Boat of Ra being towed through the Seventh Division of the Tuat 
 by the gods thereof. 
 
 Hiimilt /"^ I 
 
 [3ZD I J\ \ \ \ (^^ 
 
 [ ^y [ AAAA/vA 
 
 ■-^ '^ n' 
 
 " The gods of the Tiiat tow along this great god, and 
 " they say unto Ea : — ' Thou art towed along, great 
 "god, lord of the hours, who dost work on behalf of 
 " those who are under the earth.' The gods have life 
 "in liis attributes, and tlie spirits look upon liis forms. 
 "And llti saith unto tlicni: — 'There is magical protec- 
 " tion to you, ye who tow, and there is holiness to
 
 GODS WHOSE HANDS AND ARMS ARE HIDDEN 195 
 
 " you, yc who tow and bring me into the nethermost 
 " parts of the Tiiat, tow ye me along until [yc arrive] 
 "at the chambers (?), and take ye your stand upon the 
 " hidden mountain of the horizon." 
 
 In front of the divine towers of the boat march : — 
 1. Twelve bearded gods, the Amenxu-aaiu-kiieku- 
 siiETAU, whose hands and arms are hiddeft; tlioy are 
 described as " hidden of hands and arms and possessing 
 
 hiddenness,' 
 
 iiiiii^ iit 
 
 0^ 
 
 ffl 
 
 W^Vi 
 
 The text relating to them reads : — 
 
 I I I *-^ -* ■ • ■ AAA^v^^ I Laaaa^ I 
 
 ^r^ 
 
 -<2>- 
 
 
 I ^3, I 
 
 ^ -IT <=> ^ ^ ^ I ^^v^ 1 1 t I yj D jwiv 
 
 I I 
 
 q 
 
 
 i~vrn f 
 
 
 I AAAAAA AAA/v^^ ^ 
 
 I I I I I I I 
 
 
 ^ vyA L. W I ; 
 
 I I I I 
 
 — n czsm 
 D D 
 7i -=??^LnJ ^ 
 
 
 A^A'V\A 
 
 =^ \ 
 
 ^.U"C9.1^^ ' 
 
 ^i?. 
 
 \> 
 
 If 

 
 196 SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 [ ] ill ^ 
 
 dZD 
 
 /WVVNA 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 
 ' o ^ ^ 
 
 =Z IZTZl 
 
 " These are they who possess the hiddeiiness (or, who 
 "hold the mystery) of this great god. A^erily those 
 " who are in the Tuat see him, and the dead see him, 
 " who burn in Het-Benben (or, the temple of Ka), and 
 " they come forth to the place where is the body of this 
 " god. Ra saith unto them : — ' Eeceive ye my forms, 
 " and emln'ace ye your hidden forms (or, mysteries). 
 " Ye shall be in Het-Benben, the place where my body 
 ■■' is. The hiddenness which is in you is the hiddenness 
 '■ of the Tuat, and cover ye your arms therewith.' And 
 " they say unto Efi : — ' Let thy soul be in lieaA'en, at 
 " the head of tlie liorizon, let thy shadow penetrate 
 " the hidden place, and let thy body be to the earth ; 
 " as for the upper regions of the sky we ascribe Ra 
 
 "thereto Fulfil tliou thyself, and take thou 
 
 " thy place [with] thy l)ody in the Tuat.' Tlioir food 
 "consistetli of Dli'cvings of every kind wlierel)y souls 
 "l)ecome coutciil, and oflbrings are made unto them 
 _" ui»on earth liy reason of the siglit of the light in the 
 " Tuat." 
 
 2. Eight bearded gods, the Neteuu-heti, who stand
 
 GODS WHOSE HANDS AND ARMS ARE HIDDEN ig/ 
 
 c^ ^ ni- tf^ 2=s ,^ ^^ ^' ?^ ^ n° Sn T^ ^'" 1 ~ 
 
 ^^ " ,_, ^^ ,^ CTT J^ "lii-J ."*^ 4>^ ^- .d^ ^ 
 
 .^:= =s= A-K * -9 =^s^ ic=i^fl 4 -^ c^ fefl^ i=a K=s asas 
 
 I I ' I 
 
 Tlie Twelve Gods whose bauds and arms are hiddeu.
 
 198 
 
 SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 upright, with their hands hanging by their sides, and 
 are described as " the gods of the temples," | | ] 
 
 ; and eight gods, the Sennu, who stand 
 
 npright, with their arms held straight together in 
 front of them, at a little distance from their bodies. 
 The text which refers to them reads : — 
 
 — )^3M a/vw 
 
 I I I 
 
 tK " n - J J £3 ^ 
 
 —21 !< ■i UJ I I A/WW\ NsN\N\ «==«*'^ J 
 
 no 
 
 -Q — «- 
 
 ^ 
 
 J\ III 
 
 \\2J\ 
 
 ri A/VAAAA M 
 
 
 A 
 
 \ 
 
 \\ I 
 
 I A/WVAA ^ AAAAW 
 
 I \r-j\/\N\ 1 1 1 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 '=^ Jl I I 1 ^ W ill 1 AW^ 1 I I ]^-Z 
 
 n 
 
 AAAA/^ 
 
 11 
 
 AAAAAA AAAftAA 
 
 III I I I 
 
 slmlJi:"^ mm 
 
 A^A^AA — < 
 
 FM iTi ^ III /WWVA
 
 THE NETERU-HETI AND THE SENNU GODS IQQ 
 
 ='f>^'yi;"HAT. ^ A¥' + 
 
 
 Q 
 
 The Eight Neteru-heti. 
 
 
 Four of the Seniiu Gods,
 
 200 SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 ». a I I I I I I I I I I ^^5 
 
 ^\ 
 
 rri i jf ^ 111 ill 
 
 2^2 % 1 8 1\ ^ r^ ^^ 
 
 T Ji I 1 _B^ 2^^=^ L/wwvx iy Q- 1 M I 
 
 Tl s=i'^z^t±^^ a.. — Qq 
 I /wwv\ ^^-^ I i <^ (J 
 
 I I I I *^ I rArys/V\ AAAAAA 111 
 
 AAA/V\A 
 II 1 1 IJ 
 
 "These are they who are outside Het-Benben, and 
 " they see Ra with their eyes, and they enter into his 
 " secret (or, hidden) images ; that which is theirs is 
 " apportioned, and the Sennu gods bring it. [And Ra] 
 " saith unto them : — ' My offerings (or, provisions) are 
 " from your offerings, and my nourishment is from 
 " your nourishment w^hich is to you, ye who are in 
 " my secret phices. I protect my secret things which 
 " are in Het-Benben. Hail to you ! Your souls live, 
 " and their offerings are the offerings of KiiUTi.' Tuati 
 " saith unto them : — ' ye gods who dwell in the Tuat, 
 " who are in the divine [places] of the governor of 
 "Ament, to whom what is their due is given upon 
 " their ground, who lie down upon their own lands, 
 " your own flesh is to you, ye have gathered together 
 " your bones, ye have knit together your members, and 
 " ye have collected your flesh. There are, moreover, 
 " sweet winds to your nostrils, ye have girded on your 
 " apparel, and ye have put on your wigs.' " 
 
 In the upper register are : — 
 
 1. Twelve gods, the Kheru-metau[h], each of whom 
 holds a stake or weapon, forked at one end ; they are 
 described as " those who hold the metau weapons,"
 
 THE KHERU-METAUH GODS 201 
 
 1i ^ i k ^ ^ ill- '^'^^ **"' -^^'"""s '" 
 
 tliese reads : — . 
 
 1 1 I I I D '/w!w! 1 M ^ D _ffi^ Ji X I 1 I <^= 
 
 I I I 
 
 ^WWN 
 
 rri :m rn s '^ 4^ rn ^ iiiii'l ^ 
 
 I I I 1 <==> ^ Ji I 1 
 
 ^m^^q^l^® 
 
 I I I '^.^w. _£^ JT C^^ JT ^ fl ^ ^ I I J\ 
 
 I I I _B^ D © ^ 
 
 (|() W- ^^l'^ D ^ [j I ;^ 1 kai 
 
 4-\\\ 
 
 I D D / t g Ji <:3> I I wwv\ 
 
 
 I ,^ww^ ^111 r (^3) I X c. Ill I M _B^ <z:> 
 
 ^ fi^ I — " — / n fv y > AAAwv <r\ , ra A 
 
 III lA I I I I ^CS^ S Jr s a I I I I I 31 _B^ M^ 
 
 "Ea saith unto them: — 'Eeceive ye your metauh 
 " weapons, and take ye them with you. Hail to you, 
 " [go against] the serpent fiend Mamu ; hail to you, 
 " make ye gashes in him when the heads appear from
 
 202 
 
 SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " out of him, and turn ye him backwards.' They say 
 " unto Ra : — ' Our metanh weapons in our hands are for 
 " Ea [and against] Mamu, and we will make gashes in 
 " the great and e^'il WoKM. Ra, do away tlie heads 
 " when they come forth from the windings of the 
 " serpent Kheti.' These are the gods who are in the 
 " [Boat of Rji], and they repulse Ai)ep in the sky, and 
 " they travel through the Tuat. It is their duty to 
 
 '* •* • '* • • *.'•*.' ■» . ' * ■•'. .. ,'..•• ■■*.••.'> .^ «■ • ' «• . • ' ■ ■ • 
 i» 1~ <^ ® I J^ Jssj ^d=? \ 'tii T^A \ g^yjsy. jJL> 
 
 'i a»— 1 ^5 ,1 . c-a Tx .__a liM *-H ^ ^^ 4i2^ 
 H^H Jl^ ^^^^—' I -« ^^i*T". ::^^ '■ ifl^ O 
 
 
 The Kberu-Metauli Gods. 
 
 " turn Ijack Apep on Ijelialf of Ra in Amentet and the 
 " j)laces of the Tuat. And this god allotteth to them 
 " tlieir provisions of bread, and their beer is the tchesert 
 " drink, and their libations are of cool water, and 
 " offerings are made to them upon earth because they 
 " repulse the Enemy of Ra in Amentet." 
 
 2. The gods KiiEiiU-AMU-rEREiiu-TEru-EM-QEBU-F, and 
 the monster serpent Seba-Apep, the body of which is held
 
 THE GODS OF STAKES 
 
 203 
 
 
 
 a.. _^ 
 
 AWWVVA 
 
 > 
 
 K5 ^ ' 
 
 The Khcru-Metauh Gods. 
 
 up above tlie ground by twelve bearded gods, who are 
 described as " those who have food when the heads appear 
 
 III. Tw-elve human heads grow out from his body, 
 
 i;;ai:^>)i^a^attit>iM 
 
 T T" 
 
 AA.VV^VV\ -* — V ' III 
 
 /j ^ ^ . • ■ rr; ^ ^ 
 
 ""^ ' ' ' osrra ..= I 
 
 ^ l^'i- 
 
 o -^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 The Kheru-Metauh Gods.
 
 204 
 
 SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 the first appearing from liis head, aud tlie other eleven 
 from his hack. The text whicli rehites to them reads : — 
 
 ^\ 
 
 A^w^^ ■ 
 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 A;VWW 
 
 AAAA^^ 
 
 
 S^^ 
 
 A/VS/W\ I I I L) U 
 
 I I I 
 
 I I I 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 1 III i 
 
 J\ 
 
 A/V\A/V\ I 1 I 
 
 \\\m^ 
 
 j\ 
 
 I I I 
 
 w. 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 [^^ 
 
 ji I 
 
 J(||iiii; 
 
 ^^ c^^ 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 zi 
 
 1 flm^i 1 1 
 
 I 
 
 D 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 I l_HiJ^l Mill 
 
 ^J? '^ \\ W A A 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 ra 
 
 ra 
 
 fZI^^I^^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 "These are they who are the adversaries of his 
 " two-fold evil, and who overthrow the enemies of Ea, 
 " and it is their duty to seize the SEBA-Fiend when he 
 " maketh heads to come forth from him. [Ra] saith to
 
 THE SERPENT SEBA-APEP 205 
 
 "them: — 'Turn yc back Seba, make ye to go liack- 
 " wards Apep wlieii the heads appear from out of him, 
 "and let him perish.' [Ea] ordereth for him his 
 " destruction. ' heads, ye shall he eaten, ye shall Ije 
 " eaten, ye shall he consumed, when ye come forth from 
 "him.' Ea ordereth for them when they come forth 
 " that they shall be consumed (or, swallowed up) [in] 
 " their folds when he journeyeth to them, and that the 
 "heads shall retreat within their folds. The WoPvM 
 " Hefau shall be without eyes, and he shall l)e without 
 "his nose, and he shall be without his ears, and he 
 " shall exist upon his roarings, and he shall live upon 
 " that which he himself iittereth. The food [of these 
 "gods] consisteth of the offerings [which are made to 
 " them] upon earth." 
 
 3. An upright, bearded mummied form called Qan, 
 
 a -jj . To the neck of this figure are attached two 
 
 ropes, which are twisted together synnuetrically, and 
 are grasped by twelve bearded men with both hands. 
 Each god stands within a loop formed by the two ropes, 
 and has a star before him. The gods are described as 
 " those who hold the rope which cometh forth " 
 
 ^ \>\^'Z:Z^(^^iti§. More the figure 
 
 are the words (] zl J ^ (2 
 
 The text reads : — 
 
 
 
 1^ mm
 
 206 
 
 SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 ft "r 11 zr^ /wwn 
 
 
 Q ^^ I I » 
 
 m 
 
 Ok^^i^LM^S^S 
 
 ,/^ Ili 7i AV<A^O Q 111 
 
 
 Tlio .Serpent 8el)ii-A|H'|i, uiili the iwclvc liuninn hciuls wliicli i;i(i\v out of liia 
 boily uikI his twelve iilloii(liiiit yoiia.
 
 THE SERPENT SEBA-APEP 
 
 207 
 
 
 A^ 
 
 r~TTn -A_— ^ 'i JL O n g ^ "'^^ yV>*VWM nA»MM 
 
 4ii'& \tjW rr. o^ ^. ?^ 
 
 ^A^ 
 
 ^ • 
 
 
 
 
 The Serpent Seba-Aiiep, wiili the twelve liuiiHiii lieiiUs which grow out of his 
 Ixxlj- and his twelve atteuilant gods.
 
 208 
 
 SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 III" 
 
 . .. fl 
 
 ^ i II c. D A\ \\ I 11 c=^ § 
 
 — H — ra n ir\ n fi\ / -(^ r> AAAAAA o r\ -(^ / 
 
 ■ _il .Zl^V^ <i:HI *^^ » ^ i 1 ,WyW\ _Zi II I I iU 1 _/i /VVWV\ 
 
 ^ ft'^ ?S /T^k <=« '"=^ A tV 555CJK; i**^*' «= ■=»=^ 
 ^8?^ f= -g- ^ ^ ,8. ^ £1 A "^ 
 
 Tlie god Qeua, aud the gods who hold the roi)e. 
 
 I '=^ 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 1^ 
 
 /WWNA 
 
 I I I 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 V^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 /vvwv\ 
 
 A/WVNA I I I I I H 
 
 "The Enemy of lifi coincth I'orth IVoiii tho 'Puat. 
 " Offerings shall be made unto the gods of that whereby 
 " I exist under the trees. Seize ye the rope, and tic ye
 
 QENA AND THE GODS WHO HOLD THE ROPE 20g 
 
 cj-a _A» cw>a M .s. ^^ '=^ ^ ^ 
 fv ^JB /!=«=. ^ -^* =^ £a 1.=:=^ ',^ 
 
 ss:!3 
 
 The gods w ho hold the rope. 
 
 " therewith the mouth of Aqen. Your hours come 
 "forth, and there is benefit to you tlierein. Eest ye 
 " upon your throne[s], and let the rope enter into the 
 " mouth of the god A(,>en when he eometh to the pLace 
 
 . ..-♦ *• 
 
 » t ■ 
 
 ♦ • - .» : . • .♦ 
 
 ^^ -Xi i|-J» H-^ ^ -fe* Tsa . c=^ ?=^ ^^ 
 
 fc^ o *^ a ^ rr-^ 
 
 The ijuds who hold tlie rope. 
 
 VOL. n.
 
 210 
 
 SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 h/WVH 
 AMV/A 
 
 " where the hours are born ; Kfi crieth out, and it 
 " resteth in its place, and it maketh an end of Anecj. 
 " They say unto Ea : — ' The god Naq is tied up with 
 "the rope, the hours of the gods(?) are to thee, Ea, 
 
 " with light. Eest thou and thy hidden body ' 
 
 " Their provisions of loaves of bread are to them, their 
 " beer is tchesert, and their libations are of cool water, 
 " and offerings are made to them upon earth." 
 In the lower register are : — 
 
 1. A god, standing, and leaning 
 upon a long staff; his name is Tuati, 
 
 ^ w 
 
 2. The serpent Neiiep, , tlie 
 
 ^ ran' 
 
 long body of whicli is made to serve 
 as biers for twelve gods in mummied 
 form ; the serpent's body is provided 
 with twenty-four legs of lions, and 
 a mummied god rests over each pair 
 These gods are described as " those who 
 
 TV- 
 
 The god Tuati, 
 
 of them. 
 
 are in the body of Osiris asleep," - 
 
 I ^ 
 
 M "^^^^ "v^ I , and "those who are in inactivity," 
 
 3. Four gods, each with his arms stretclied straight 
 together before him at an acute angle with his body. 
 
 The legend reads, IcJiatit-ta-rut ^f\ ' 
 
 O 
 
 ^^
 
 THE TWELVE SLEEPING GODS 
 
 211 
 
 
 
 £^ 
 
 AV^ ii-=*=* 
 
 ; j.}^4..ifrA 
 
 <ri:>.^CM<!sa,i^CkaAtViUUiMk^^:.A^<i{ttiUuaAciMAAAA^^^&.\.-i^ 
 
 .. Ji.vj-. ' . ' . .i, . ' .«.'. ' •.•- ' «'. ^.'. -J .J.- ■• ' .-■[■'■ «•.:«•« .-V'' - • i TTT^^^'"^''^^^?^?'^^?^*?!' 
 
 
 ^. =#, -^ ^^ ^ ^ 4^ W-* v' 
 
 '^s£ ^^ 
 
 The gods who are asleep iu the body of Osiris,
 
 X^ - -^ i«„ • • • II ^*V^ Avww\ »W »«» .'■ , 1 RB» 
 
 >>A^ -^ ^?fe< A,vsjjv, ,,vyiv« 
 
 j)e^ji ^XSivV^ -J^ J»^ *VVVWJ 
 
 TtC^ B~^ ^hJ i^ SL 
 
 «^P ^T* /^^ ,1 III 
 
 fr.ll 
 
 kill 1^ ^^ ff^ r^H ?>f^' S==? I * ^^r Wf», • ' .' «l^ I 4B> 
 
 X\ J». L^ i*iv>^ ^"' i^ ^^ -F •=^ 1^ 
 
 l,^ ^ iii , J A,n ^ ^i 
 
 
 The gods who are asleep in the body of Osiris.
 
 l^c^ »j" 8>.« ^:p, A 3« n^ S^ ^- M r^ ^ ^^ I.T. 
 
 • • • V,\ ^- ^C- TTT ^~^, ^ ^ *^ 
 
 Four Khast-ta-rut Gods. 
 
 \^'\=l))^ 
 
 
 * X»wv \^ 
 
 
 I . i. . ... ' 
 
 A jrod in The serpent in the round 
 
 mummied form. ijool of fire. 
 
 Four Khast-ta-rut Gods.
 
 214 
 
 SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 4. Four gods. 
 
 5. A serpent within a circle filled with water. 
 
 6. A god in mummied form. 
 
 The text relating to these reads : — 
 
 
 r 
 
 "Fill 
 
 /I 
 
 III I I I 
 
 I I s=> I 
 
 — »— ^ I /^>^AA^ I I 
 
 I /^>^AA^ I I Q. Ill 
 
 ^ 
 
 AV\AAA H Zl I g > I i^ (i. /V^AAAA 
 
 1 I n V— fl I AAAAA^ MM' 
 
 T^%K 
 
 m^^ iiirriV.:F 
 
 ® S Q O^ I I I II ^ \ 
 
 D 
 
 AA/\AAA 
 
 ^ly 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 I I 
 
 I 
 
 I AA^NAAA 
 
 I I 
 
 A/VNAAA 
 
 I I 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 I M II I 
 
 AAAAAA Ci 
 
 W;\ AAAA/V\ 
 
 
 fi 
 
 AAAAAA 
 I I I 
 
 
 I A/VWV\ I 1 I 
 
 I AAAAAA 
 \> I I I I 
 
 ^ I 
 
 V 
 
 A/VAW\ AAAAAA 
 
 AAAAAA '•-"""'- AAAAAA 
 AAA/VV\ AAAAAA I I I I I I 
 
 c^ D I I I 
 
 I I I 
 
 ^i^ 
 
 AAAAA^ H 
 
 AA^WNA AAAAAA 
 fVWW\ I I I 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 ra D 
 
 »t^^:i:"iv^i
 
 THE TWELVE SLEEPING GODS, ETC. 
 
 215 
 
 r^ 
 
 MM ^ 111 
 
 llCil^f 
 
 ? 
 
 n 
 
 — " — iEZ 
 
 /VWVV\ /f' ">v 
 
 III ^ III 
 
 ^ \> 
 
 1 I 1 I ^ I s 
 
 ^) I A^ III I I I _M^ 
 
 W^ 
 
 O 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 AAAAAA A/WVV\ I I I I I S 
 
 8 
 
 ■? lU I 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 I I I 
 
 AAA/ 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 *1 
 
 ."1 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 „ AA^VSAA AAAAAA 
 
 '— ' U A/V\AAA /WVW\ AAAAAA 
 
 oQ,$ra 
 
 ^1111 
 
 I s 
 
 S. 
 
 ^ O 
 
 I I s 
 
 ^ *-> A/VWV\ _m^ AAAAAA — »— ' ^ 'N 1 ^ (UK AAAAAA Zl U 
 
 Pi p / AAA/^A^ I 
 , 1 ^ AAAAAA I 
 
 AAAA^\A ^ 
 
 ^ o 
 
 ra 
 
 ^ o 
 
 ,C3J;p— «7 AAAAAA 1^ AA/W\A 1^ f\ ^ A^yw^^ p r] ^ -1 
 
 A/VVW\ , 
 AAAAAA 
 
 *1 
 
 "^ o,
 
 2T6 
 
 SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 a^iznjM 
 
 -ra^^-^M ffl 
 
 ra 
 
 I <=> 2:5=5 I I 
 
 n^ 
 
 ^ O 
 
 fifl^$?kniii^ 
 
 
 /^ 
 
 (E3) 
 
 1 O v^ AAAA/ 
 
 ^ I I I 1 I I 
 
 /^A^v^AA M AA/^/v^A 
 
 
 » Msrj\l\j\ /-\ - 
 ' H W 
 
 <i a I I I I I s 
 
 
 ^ /WVW\ ■ ' ' AA^AA^ 
 
 ^w^NAA ^:^ LI I I I 
 
 I I I A/vw^^ 
 
 AA/W^V\ I I I 
 
 A^^>A^^ — If 
 
 AW/V\A 
 
 A/V\AAA 
 
 rcD 
 
 <Ci^ 
 
 -H- 
 
 I /W\AAA 
 
 rt3 I 1 I I 
 
 /w^vvA (-] pi AW\A^ 
 III 7i III 
 
 1'k§^ 
 
 /^^AA\^ — m- 
 
 A/WVV\ 
 
 I I I .y^ I s 
 
 I /VV^AA^ I AV\/vV\ ^* *>, AA/WV\ \\\ hH | O 
 
 i^^^i I n Q. nil I I -^^ I I 1 1 I i-M5t(^3)iA 
 
 A^WWS M- 
 
 _, I i\) /VVWVv AAAAAA VVWV\ 
 ^ ;/V I [ I III /VVWNA 
 
 fW\r\AA A^AAAA I I I 
 
 ^ 
 
 Sf 
 
 ^.^M 
 
 0' 
 
 <^,N 
 
 ^ o 
 
 1 _ /I "^ r~\ AAAAAA 
 
 " Tliu g(jd Tuati saith unto thcni : — ' Hail, ye gods
 
 THE SERPENT NEHEP, ETC. 217 
 
 " who are over the Tuat, yc gods who dwell in this 
 " [place] of the governor of Anient, who abide per- 
 " manently on your places, and who lie down upon 
 "your couches, lift up the flesh of your bodies, and 
 "gather together your bones, and gird up your 
 " members, and bring ye into one place your flesh ! 
 " There is sweet (or, fresh) air for your nostrils. Loose 
 " and take oil" your funeral swathings, untie and remove 
 " your wigs, unclose your eyes and look ye at the light 
 " therewith, rise ye up from out of your inert and 
 " helpless state, and take possession yourselves of your 
 " fields in Sekhet-nebt-hetepu (i.e.. Field, lord of offer- 
 " ings). There are fields for you in this Field, and the 
 "waters thereof are for you. Let your offering be 
 " there, [and] fields from Nebt-hetepu.' Their libations 
 "shall be of water. It is the serpent Nehep who 
 " giveth their bodies [and] their souls, and they journey 
 "on to Sekhet-Aaru to have dominion over their 
 "libations, and to walk over the earth. They count 
 " up their flesh, their food is of bread-cakes, and 
 " their drink is of tchesert ale, and their libations 
 " are of water. Offerings are made unto them upon 
 "earth as [unto] the god Sah, who resteth upon his 
 " ground." 
 
 "These are they whu arc in the circuit uf tliis pnol. 
 " There is a serpent living in this pool, and the water 
 " of the pool is of fire, and the gods of the e^rth and 
 " the souls of the earth cannot descend thereto by 
 "reason of the flames of fire of this serpent. This
 
 2l8 SEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 'great god who is the governor of the Tuat liveth 
 ' in the water of this pool." 
 
 And Ea saith unto them : — " Hail to you, ye gods 
 ' who guard this holy pool, give ye yourselves to him 
 ' that is the Governor of Aukert. The water of this 
 ' pool is Osiris, and this water is Khenti-Tuat. This 
 ' flame consumeth and destroyeth the souls which dare 
 ' to approach Osiris, and the awe of this pool cannot 
 ' be done away, or made an end of, or overcome. As 
 ' for the gods who keep ward over its waters, their 
 ' food is bread, and their drink is tchesert ale, and 
 ' their libations are of water. Offerings are made unto 
 ' them upon earth as unto Teri in Amentet, lord of 
 ' offerings. There are fields for you in this Field, 
 ' and the waters thereof are for you. Let your offer- 
 ' ings Ije there [and] fields from Nebt-lietepu. Their 
 ' libations shall be of water. It is the serpent Nehep 
 'who giveth their bodies [and] their souls, and they 
 'journey into Sekhet-Aaku to have dominion over 
 ' their libations, and to walk on the earth. They 
 ' count up their limbs, their food is of liread-cakes, and 
 ' their drink is of tchesert ale, and their libations are 
 ' of water. Offerings are made unto them upon earth 
 ' as unto Saii, who resteth upon his ground. 
 
 " These are they who are in the circuit of this pool. 
 ' There is a serpent living "
 
 ( 219 ) 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 THE GATE OF SET-HRA. 
 
 The Eighth Division of the Tuat. 
 
 Having passed through the Seventh Division of the 
 Tuat, the boat of the Sun arrives at the gateway called 
 Bekhkhi, J J [](| f^ liriD, which leads to the Eighth 
 Division, or, as the opening text reads : <rp> 1] "I 
 
 <::;;:> | c^ ^ /wvw\ A -A _cr^ '^ -^ av/^^a avv^v\ U I I /vvwvi 
 
 ^■'^^ O "^ ' [j -fl- t\ v\ I "^^^^ , " This great god 
 n^ I 111 iU J^ Jl I 1 I I' 
 
 "cometh forth to this gate, and entereth through it, 
 " and the gods who are therein acclaim this great god." 
 The gateway is like that through which the god passed 
 into the previous Division, and its outwork is guarded 
 by nine gods in the form of mummies, who are described 
 
 R III 
 as the Paut, i.e., the company of the nnie gods, ^ iii '=>. 
 
 At the entrance to tlie gate proper stands a bearded, 
 mummied form, with his hands folded on his l)reast, 
 
 '^'''^ , and at its exit stands a similar 
 form called Heptti, | ^ '^ ^^; each of these is said
 
 220 EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 to " extend his arms and hands to Ka," ft I '^^s— 
 
 .- a;^^_ ^ . The corridor is swept by flames of fire, 
 
 which proceed from the mouths of two uraei, as before. 
 The company of the gods who guard the outwork 
 address Efi, and say, " Come thou to us, thou who 
 " art at the head of the horizon, thou great god 
 " who openest hidden places, open for thyself the holy 
 
 " pylons, and unfold the doors thereof," -^^ -^-^ ^^^zz:^ i 
 
 The monster serpent, which 
 stands on his tail and guards the door, is called Set-hra, 
 * , and the two lines of text which refer to his 
 
 admission of Ka read, " He who is over this door 
 "openeth to Ea. Sa saith unto Set-hra: — Open thy 
 "gate to Ka, unfold thy portal to Khuti, so that he 
 " may illumine the thick darkness, and may send light 
 " into the hidden abode. This gate closeth after the 
 " great god hath passed through it, and the souls who 
 " are on the other side of it wail when they hear the 
 
 " door closing \\\nm them," ^^ V ^ ^ 
 
 *" i) I ^S . a cnj 1 "^ "^ 1 Tnmir / '^jil
 
 
 The gate of the Serpent Set-hra.
 
 222 
 
 EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 1 
 
 D 
 
 z4 -A I A^(Vv^^ 
 
 ra © ?) 1 
 
 Leg 
 
 4 
 
 iiiiiiiii 
 
 111 the middle of the Division we see tlie boat of 
 Ea being towed on its way by four gods of the Tuat, 
 
 ; the god is in the same form as before, 
 
 and Sa stands on the look-out, and Heka obeys his 
 instructions as to the steering. At the head of the 
 
 
 IffliM 
 
 The Bout of Ra being towed through the Eighth Division of the Tuat 
 by the gods thereof. 
 
 four gods who tow the boat stands an aged god, who 
 leans on a long staff', and is called " He who dwelleth 
 
 in Nu," - 
 
 DOO 
 
 Immediately in front of the 
 
 divine procession is a long tank, wherein we see four 
 groups, each containing four beings, who are repre- 
 sented in the act of performing various evolutions in 
 
 the water. These are called Herpiu, ^ D (](] yN i, 
 Akiu, (j S (j () ^ , NuBiu, r^ J (] () ^ I , and Kiiepau,
 
 THE GODS OF THE WATERS 223 
 
 r-> Kw v^ •, wliicli names may 1)e translated 
 
 " Bathers, Floaters, Swininiers, and Divers." The text 
 which refers to this section reads : — 
 
 T1^^.2^V1Ji^\ifl 
 
 
 AAAAAA """** (p 
 
 I I I v^ 
 
 «^o I 
 
 ■"1 
 
 C\ ; 
 
 B t] 
 
 ^1^! 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 *-* rrV^ 'A^^za — 1 I I U AVVA"A 
 
 . , T7 AAA/V\A 
 
 ms^A s 
 
 >k 
 
 I I 
 
 I I I 
 
 rti 
 
 ^ :r^ 
 
 <£? ^ 
 
 AA/VW\ 
 A(WVV\ M — 
 
 (^ 1 I I 
 
 o<^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 — I A/WVW 
 
 os: 
 
 
 
 e III 
 
 i^1=1i^i^°1VTi^^i^i 
 
 Jfl^^lfli^.v^l 
 
 AAAAAA 
 O 11 /WvVvA 
 
 -> 
 
 ^ W 
 
 D J\ 
 
 rm 
 
 
 I I III 
 
 11 ^i; 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 /WW\A I I I I I <ZI> (5 
 
 fv »< — ^ I ^ n c / 
 
 1 p ^irnlV 
 
 1 1 fVWJV, O A/VWV\ — — 
 
 I I I
 
 224 
 
 EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 ffi(J0!D?^D2^ 
 
 P^ 
 
 m 
 
 /WWVS 
 
 I I I 
 
 ^!\\^ 
 
 ft AAA^AA T^ 
 
 I £r ^ 
 
 
 /SA/VNAA 
 
 ] M I I I I 
 
 o 
 
 I I I I I I 
 
 
 AA^^/^A 
 
 1 I ^ @ I 
 
 ^ I I I I I I 
 
 D 
 
 s 
 
 <;b^ AAAWVV f^\ 
 
 ^^ I I I (2 ^ 
 
 ww\ — ♦< — c-\ 
 
 S 
 
 ? 
 
 ^J ^ D 2^^^ 1 
 
 I s ^ 111 I I I Jy 
 
 i^il 
 
 X 
 
 ^ III . 
 
 ^ w 
 
 ; •5j=^ o I 
 
 !^0l 
 
 AA/W\A M 
 
 A/WVAA '^'^^^ 
 A/WW\ I 1 I '^ 
 
 AWVV\ 
 A/WV\A 
 A/V^A/V\ 
 
 Mis: 
 
 A^W^A^ 
 
 D 
 
 The first section of this text reads : — 
 
 This great god is towed along by gods of the Tuat, 
 and behold, those wlio tow Ea along say, " Let there be 
 "praise in heaven to tlie soul of Efi, and let there be 
 "praise on earth to liis l>o(ly, ftir heaven is made young 
 " by means of his soul, and earth is made young by 
 " means of his body. Hail ! We open for tliee the 
 " hidden place, and we make straight for thee the roads 
 " of Akert. I'e thou at peace, Efi, witli thy hidden 
 "things, thou who art praised [by] tliy secret things 
 " in thy forms (or, attri[)utes). Hail ! We tow thee
 
 THE GODS OF THE WATERS 225 
 
 *' along, Ea, we guide thee, thou who art at the 
 " head of heaven, and thou comest forth to those who 
 " arc immersed in the waters, and thou slialt make thy 
 ** way over them." 
 
 The passage which refers to the aged god reads : — 
 
 "He (literally, those) who is in Nu saith to those 
 
 " who are immersed in the water, and to those who are 
 
 " swimming in the pools of water, ' Look ye at Rii, who 
 
 " journeyeth in his boat, [for he is] Great of Mystery, 
 
 <**"*« >^>« ^an **"^ ♦' », il I XI <"S> I 2- I .vv^^«• • * r—l III " Aw«yvv> /HVWA 
 
 The Four Herpiu Gods, and the Four Akiix Gods. 
 
 " It is he who ordereth the destinies (or, affairs) of the 
 " gods, it is he who perf ormeth (or, maketh) the plans 
 " of the Khu (i.e., the spirits). Hail ! Eise up, ye 
 " beings of time, pay ye heed to Ea, for it is he wlio 
 " ordereth your destinies.' " 
 
 The speech of Ea reads : — 
 
 " Put fortli your heads, ye who are immersed in 
 
 " tlie water, thrust out your arms, ye who arc under 
 
 " the waters, stretch out your legs, ye who swim, let 
 
 " there be breath to your nostrils, ye who are deep 
 
 VOL. n. Q
 
 226 
 
 EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 "ill the waters. Ye shall have dominion over your 
 " waters, ye shall be at peace in your tanks of cool 
 " waters, ye shall pass through the waters of Nu, and ye 
 " shall make a way through your cisterns. Your souls 
 " are upon earth, and they shall be satisfied with their 
 " means of subsistence, and they shall not suffer destruc- 
 " tion. Their food shall consist of the offerings of the 
 " earth, and meat and drink shall be given unto them 
 " upon earth, even as to him that hath obtained dominion 
 
 
 
 A- 
 • • I M 
 
 'ij^rr.i^-^i 
 
 The Four Nubiu Gods, and the Four Khcpau Gods. 
 
 " over his offerings upon earth, and whose soul is not 
 " upon the earth. Their food shall consist of bread, 
 "and their drink shall be tche.sert wine, and their 
 <' cisterns shall Ije full of cool water, and there shall be 
 " offered unto them upon eartli of tliat whicli tliis lake 
 " produceth." 
 
 In the upper register arc the following : — 
 1. Twelve ])earded gods, who stand with their arms 
 lianging by tlioh- sides, and are described as tlie "divine 
 "sovereign chiefs who give the bread wliich hatli been
 
 THE TCHATCIIAU AND THE SOULS OF SERSER 227 
 
 " allotted and green herbs to the souls who are in the 
 " Lake of Serser (i.e., blazing fire)," I i ^ 
 
 CF=0 
 
 ^ v_-^ 
 
 ^f — .^'iS 
 
 
 The Tchalchau -who give tlie bread of Maat, 
 
 Souls who are in the Lake of Serser. 
 
 2. Nine bearded, human-headed and human-handed 
 hawks, which stand with their hands raised in adora- 
 tion ; before each is a loaf of bread, ^ , and a few
 
 228 
 
 EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 green herbs, '^. These are described as the "souls 
 " who are in the Lake of Serser," J^ 
 
 I 3S 
 
 o. A god, who holds a sceptre in his right hand, and 
 •¥- in his left. 
 
 The texts which relate to these read : — 
 
 AN^AW H- 
 
 '19- 
 
 AAAAAA « [-AWW\-|^^ 1 1 f3 Ci 
 
 ^AAAA I I I I ^,^A& I 1 1 
 
 '^ 
 
 III I s 
 
 I I I I A^V^ 
 
 ... I s 
 
 0-^=^e^l^-^|^tr^ 
 
 \IT ^AAAA^ 
 
 111 ' ' I 
 
 1 I I A^WWA 
 
 =L' AAA/W\ 
 
 ' nn I 
 
 
 HI 
 
 
 /w\^A^ <■ -* 
 
 £5:5 
 
 A^^AAA 
 
 V -t c:^ I 
 
 ■ ' " ' ' AWVV\ 
 
 33: 
 
 
 ^'^ _S^ 111 II I -M^t (^ I X ^ III I I I 
 
 V=^ ^ I 
 
 1\J A^yvAAA 
 
 
 ra AAAWA r\ ^ 
 
 n ^-^^. 
 
 A'^W^A I I I I I S 
 
 ^.iij I II 
 
 I s 
 
 /W\AAA 
 
 A^AAA^ 
 I I I
 
 THE SOULS OF SERSER 
 
 22g 
 
 I 
 
 I I I I 
 
 ? 
 
 /\/\/v\/\/\ 
 
 I s 
 
 AAAAA/\ I I I 
 
 I "^ I AA/V^AA 
 
 1 
 
 D 
 
 m I ^ 
 
 1 AA/W\A 
 I AA/Y^AA 
 
 1 I 1 ,\Af\/V\f\ I I I I /VW^A 
 
 °^ 
 
 AA/VNAA ' '^'^ AA/VSAA 
 
 (^^ I L Ji I I m _£[ 111 
 
 Mils 
 
 ^ W 
 
 ^" 
 
 f] 
 
 A/WAAA O 
 
 '^cz:::^ 
 
 ?:i 
 
 AAA/W\ f-AfVW^ 
 
 "TTH 
 
 ^^^ I H 
 
 ^ 
 
 I ' * ^ < AA(VvV\ 
 
 1 1 lO I 
 
 ra 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 I I I 
 
 w 
 
 
 o 
 I 
 
 I t^ /WW\A Jo 
 
 I^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 I A/\A/W\ 
 I I I I 
 
 rm 
 
 AAA/^^ 
 
 r ° 
 
 AAAAA 
 
 ^ ill U'^ I I I 
 
 W^^A\ AW^A^ 
 I I 1 AA/W^^ 
 ( AAAAAA 
 
 The porti(jn of the text which refers to tlie twelve 
 sovereign chiefs reads : — 
 
 " These are they who make souls to have a right to 
 " the green herljs in the Lake of Serser. Ea saith 
 " unto them : — ' [Hail, ye] divine sovereign princes of 
 " the gods, and ye chiefs of the Lake of Serser, who 
 "place souls over their green herbs, let them have
 
 230 EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " dominion themselves over their bread ; give ye your 
 " bread which is appointed, and bring ye your green 
 " herbs to the souls who have been ordered to exist 
 " in the Lake of Serser.' They say unto Ea : — ' The 
 " bread appointed hath been and the green herbs have 
 •' been brought to the divine souls whom thou hast 
 " ordered to exist in the Lake of Serser. Hail ! Verily, 
 " the way is fair ; for Khenti-Amenti praiseth thee, 
 " and those who dwell in Ta-thenen praise thee.' Their 
 " food is of bread-cakes, and their beer is the tcliesert 
 " beer, and their libations are of cool water ; and 
 " offerings are made unto them upon earth by those 
 " who are with (?) Tui by the divine sovereign princes." 
 
 The passage which refers to the souls in the Lake of 
 Serser reads : — • 
 
 "These are they who are in the Land of Serser; 
 " they have received their l)read, and they have gained 
 " the mastery over this Lake, and they praise this 
 "great god. Ea, saith unto them: — 'Eat ye your 
 "green her])R, and satisfy ye yourselves with your 
 " cakes ; let there be fulness to your bellies, and satis- 
 " faction to your hearts. Your green herbs arc of 
 "the Lake of Serser, the Lake which may not 1)0 
 "approached. Praise ye me, glorify ye me, for I am 
 " the Great One of terror of the Tuat.' They say 
 " unto Ea : — ' Kail to thee, thou Great One of the 
 " SEKiiitviu (i.e., Powers) ! Praise is thine, and majesty 
 "is tliiiio. The Tuat is tliino, and [is subservient] to 
 " thy will ; it is a hidden place [made] by thee for
 
 THE BURNT ENEMIES OF OSIRIS 
 
 231 
 
 " those who are in its Circles. The height of Heaven 
 " is thine, and [is suhservient] to thy will ; it is a 
 "secret place [made] by thee for those who belong 
 " thereto. The Earth is for thy dead Body, and the 
 " Sky is for thy Soul. Ra, be thou at peace (or, be 
 " content) with that which thou hast made to come 
 "into being.' Their food consisteth of bread-cakes, 
 " their green herbs are the plants of the spring, and 
 " the waters wherein they refresh themselves are cool* 
 
 . • • 1 1 1 . i 
 
 Souls who are in the Lake of Serser. 
 
 A god with a sceptre. 
 
 " Offerings are made unto them upon the earth as 
 " [being] the product of this liake of Serser." 
 In the lower register are : — 
 
 1. Horus [the Aged], in the furm of a bearded man, 
 leaning upon a staff. 
 
 2. Twelve bearded beings, who are described as the 
 
 "burnt enemies of Osiris," 4-\°00 j3 J^ 
 (ifl) \^\\ I . The first four have their arms tied
 
 232 
 
 EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 behind their back in such a way that the right hand 
 projects at the left side, and the left hand at the right 
 side. The second four have their hands tied together 
 at the ell)Ows, and the upper parts of the arms are at 
 right angles to their shoulders. The third four have 
 their arms tied together at the elbows, and their elbows 
 are on a lower level than their shoulders. 
 
 3. A monster speckled serpent, which lies in undu- 
 lations immediately in front of the enemies of Osiris, 
 
 r 
 
 ;ct 
 
 
 Horus the Aj«-ed. The Burnt Enemies of Osiris. 
 
 and belches fire into the face of their leader ; the name 
 
 of this serpent is Kheti, ^ 1 1 . In each undulation 
 
 stands a bearded god in mummied form, and the 
 hieroglyphics written alcove describe them as " the 
 
 gods who are above Kiieti," ] V 
 
 1 I 1^ \\ 
 
 The text reads : — 
 
 ^=S^ 
 
 -5^ 
 
 tJ\/W^ f\/\f\fJV\ 
 
 n 
 
 D
 
 THE ENEMIES OF OSIRIS 233 
 
 ■^ 1(2 111- fl 
 
 AAA^^A^ I A»NA/W\ 
 
 i Ji U^e ^1 I II I II I MM 1^^ 
 
 e ^^ I X iK _^iii III ^ 1111 x^^>^ 
 
 I I |;^| llXiJ ^5 ^mi I I 1^-^ I ^ e 
 
 I I I 
 
 III 
 
 (]J^ 
 
 Q 
 
 I AA/VS/V\ 
 
 
 iimnr <=^ ^^ 
 
 iiiiiiiii 
 
 ^ _^ I I I 2^.=:^ /wv^ V— fl ^z:^ C3a i;—.^ © ^ _^^^ 
 
 nn.tv'i — =n? 
 
 
 fifi-aiii^inJmy
 
 234 
 
 EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 
 
 :^:i^ 
 
 
 .■fT.j-.fUlJ^ 
 
 nmww S 
 
 D 
 X 
 " [This scene representetli] 
 " what Horns cloeth for his 
 " father Osiris. The enemies 
 " who are in this scene have 
 " their calamities ordered for 
 " them hy Horns, who saith 
 " nnto them : — ' Let there l)e 
 " fetters on yonr arms, O 
 " enemies of my father, let 
 " yonr arms be tied np towards 
 " yonr heads, ye who have 
 " no [power], ye shall be fettered 
 " [with yonr arms] behind you, 
 " ye who are hostile to Rfu 
 " Ye shall l)e hacked in pieces,
 
 THE SERPENT KHETI 235 
 
 "ye sliall nevermore have your heing, your souls shall 
 " be destroyed, and none [of you] shall live ]>ecause of 
 " what ye have done to my father Osiris ; ye have 
 "put [his] mysteries behind your backs, and ye have 
 "dragged out the statue [of the god] from the secret 
 " place. The word of my father Osiris is madt against 
 "you, and my word is maot against you, ye who 
 " have desecrated (literally, laid bare) the hidden things 
 " which concern the rest (or, resting-place) of the Great 
 " One who begot me in the Tuat. ye shall cease to 
 " exist, ye shall come to an end.' " 
 
 " Horus saith : — ' [0] my serpent Kiiet, thou Mighty 
 " Fire, from whose mouth cometh forth this flame 
 " which is in my Eye, whose undulations are guarded 
 " by [my] children, open thy mouth, distend thy jaws, 
 " and belch forth thy fires against the enemies of my 
 " father, burn thou up their bodies, consume their 
 "souls by the fire which issueth from thy mouth, 
 "and by the flames which are in thy body. My 
 " divine children are against them, they destroy 
 " [their] spirits, and those who have come forth from 
 "me are against them, and they shall never more 
 " exist. The fire which is in this serpent shall come 
 " forth, and shall blaze against these enemies whenso- 
 " ever Horus decreeth that it shall do so.' Whosoever 
 " knoweth how to use words of power [against] this 
 " serpent shall be as one who doth not enter upon his 
 " fiery path," 
 
 The end of this text on the sarcophagus of Seti I. is
 
 236 EIGHTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 defective, but from the tomb of Eameses VI. we see 
 that it should end thus : — " Offerings shall be made 
 " to these gods who are upon this great serpent. Their 
 " food is of bread, their drink is of fesher beer, and the 
 " waters of their libations are cool."
 
 ( 237 ) 
 
 CHAPTER XL 
 THE GATE OF AB-TA. 
 
 The Ninth Division of the Tuat. 
 
 Having passed through the Eighth Division of the 
 Tuat, the boat of the sun arrives at the gateway called 
 
 which leads to the 
 
 ^ III 
 
 Aat-shefsheft, ^ i 
 
 Ninth Division, or, as the opening text reads : <===> [1 >/ 
 
 1' D---^n p- - T^n p- - [) 
 
 ^ fl — «— '^^'^^ I] ' ^ i ~ ' ""*"' 
 
 " This great god cometh to this gate, and entereth 
 " through it, and the gods who are therein acclaim this 
 " great god." The gateway is like that through which 
 the god passed into the previous Division, and its 
 outwork is guarded by nine gods in the form of 
 mummies, who are described as the Paut, i.e., the 
 
 company of the nine gods, ^iii^. At the entrance 
 
 to the gate proper stands a bearded, mummied form, 
 with his hands folded on his l)reast, called Anhefta, 
 
 1) R , and at its exit stands a similar form
 
 238 NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 called Ekmen-ta, '" ; each of these is said to 
 
 " extend his arms and hands to Ea," ft 1 cj^^j 
 
 or fi ^ 2^-==— - 1^=^ . The corridor is swept by 
 
 flames of fire, which proceed from the months of two 
 nraei, as before. The company of the gods who guard 
 the outwork address Ea, and say, " Come thou to us, 
 " thou who art the head of the horizon, thou great 
 "god who openest the secret places, open for thyself 
 " the holy pylons, and unfold for thyself the holy doors 
 
 " tliereof," ^^rn(f|[,^,,cO:]JDV^ 
 1^ — — — c=.^| j,^^ 
 
 AAAAA^ 
 
 -innmr ^cz:^ U 1 _g^ nzsiD -^z::^ I I I ^'^^-^ Jl 1 
 monster serpent which stands on his tail and guards 
 
 the door is called Ab-ta, I X " , and the two lines 
 
 of text which refer to his admission of Ea read, " He 
 " who is over this door openeth to Ea. Sa saith unto 
 " Ab-ta, ' Open thy gate to Ea, unfold thy portal to 
 " KiiUTi, so that he may illumine the thick darkness, 
 " and may send light into the hidden abode.' This gate 
 " closeth after this god hath passed through it, and the 
 " souls who are on the other side of it wail when they 
 
 " hear this door closing upon them," -^^ ^ , D I 
 
 ,v,,„,^ ..^g^ 5li \ OTt Timmr [i:^ awwv a/v!La I a^^wvs ^ W
 
 ■ ,l. l .-'. » ., ■ , 
 
 ' ' • *' »'• » 
 
 The Gate of Ab-ta.
 
 240 
 
 NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 III AWW\ 
 
 ^ 
 
 c^ A J\ 
 
 M 
 
 1 
 
 □ ratK 
 
 v>A ^ _zr 
 
 I L - 
 
 - I 
 
 J\ 1 D 
 
 IIIIMIII A^/wvs' 
 
 In the middle of the Division we see the boat of 
 Ra being towed on its way by four gods of the Tuat, 
 
 ; the god is in the same form as before, 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ »- • II— . >»AAA«M I I £\_ 
 
 III ?^ « • - 
 
 i • 
 
 
 
 I • J 
 
 AW^WX 
 
 
 Tho Boat of Af-Ril in the Ninth Division of the Tuat. 
 
 and Sa stands on the look-out, and Heka obeys his 
 instructions as to steering. The procession which 
 marches in front of the boat consists of : — 
 
 1. Six bearded male figures, standing upright, who 
 hold in their liands the ends of a rod, or rope, which 
 is l)cnt in tlie shape of a liow over tlicir lieads ; these 
 are descril)od as " tlioso who are over the words of 
 
 magical power," pni^^^^ii^^l^i-
 
 THE GODS WHO CAST SPELLS 
 
 241 
 
 2. Four dog-headed apes, which hold a rod bent as 
 already described ; these are described as " those who 
 
 work magic by means of knots for Ea," ogjggo (1(1 v^ 1 O. 
 3. Four women, who stand upright, and hold a bent 
 
 Gods, goddesses, and apes casting spoils on Apop. 
 
 The speannen. 
 
 Sliesshes and Apep. 
 
 rod, or rope, over their heads like the four apes and 
 the six male figures; they are descril)ed as "those who 
 
 work magic by means of knots for Ea," "im^ [1 (1 O . 
 
 4. Tbree male figures, each holding a harpoon in 
 VOL. n. li
 
 242 NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 his right hand, and a cord in his left ; they are called 
 
 " spearmen," o J J v\ \\ ^^ 1 . Immediately in 
 
 front of these is a beartled male figure, who has been 
 lying prostrate on his face ; he has upon his head a 
 small solar disk and a pair of ass's ears, and his name 
 
 is Aai, (]'^^(](]5 i-e-> the Ass. In his hands he 
 
 grasps a rope, which passes over his head and along his 
 back, and is held by each of the three spearmen in his 
 left hand ; from the knees upwards his body is raised 
 in a diagonal position, and this attitude suggests that 
 he has either raised himself by means of the rope, or 
 has been pulled into this position by the spearmen. 
 Facing the Ass are : — 1. Tlie monster serpent Apep, 
 
 ^^^^' , and 2. The crocodile Shessiies, rm 1 izszi 1, 
 
 with a tail ending in the head of a serpent. 
 
 The text, which refers to the whole of this section, 
 reads : — 
 
 J\ I /vwwv - D ^H I III ^ -^ W 1 1 I I A III 
 
 O 
 I 
 
 I ^ jr <^=> Ji I fl Ji 111 ' I I I /wvw. I I I 
 
 I (^ M 7\ I I I Ji^ ^ I I X m. I I I
 
 DEFEAT OF APEP 
 
 243 
 
 D D ^ _M^ ' 
 ^<— - <^^ 
 
 AA/VNAA 
 
 I I I 
 
 I I Q AAAAftA 
 
 ' ^ W Zl 7i I 1 I 
 
 I I I 
 
 ^ n n — *— 
 
 /V/y«y^/^ AAAA/NA 
 
 l^k^^ml'n^rfiflraqypjiii 
 
 -^ W ^ I I I Q ^^^ 
 
 ii-q^rsr^i^^^i^y-'^^ 
 
 (fe^ 
 
 D D 
 
 ( ^"^/wv^ il^l^ZJ J] III -::=:P5 X 
 
 ^ 
 
 i^iyi^y 
 
 BV^\A 
 
 I I I 
 
 i /VWW\ H — 
 
 ™ u rn uii^ 
 
 ^^ ,v 
 
 w 
 
 I 1-^-^ m ., — c 
 I ° <=> JJ 
 
 ^::^ 
 
 1110 
 
 I I I 
 
 
 (JAAa 
 
 1-^^l 
 
 D D 1 II 
 
 1 
 
 D «Q. 
 
 (\AAAA ■*■ 
 
 1VW 
 
 ^ W 
 I 
 
 I D <S <©) CI I D O -^ 
 
 <=] I D e <^C3 
 
 IICKl 1 I 
 
 " This great god is towed along by the gods of the 
 " Tuat, aud those who tow llii along say : — ' The god
 
 244 NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " Cometh to his body, aud the god is towed along to his 
 " shadow. be thou at peace with thy body, and we 
 " will tow thee along in tliy integrity into thy (literally, 
 " his) secret place. Come thou, Eii, and be thou at 
 " peace with thy body, for thou shalt be protected by 
 " those who are over the curved ropes (?).' " 
 
 The text which refers to the six men, four 
 apes, and four women, with nets over their heads, 
 reads : — 
 
 " Those who are in this picture march before E.l, and 
 " they utter words of power against Apep, and [then] 
 "return to the Arit (or, Hall) of the horizon. They 
 "journey onwards with him into the height of heaven, 
 " and they come into Ijeing for him in the Atekti 
 "(i.e., the two portions of the sky in which Ea rises 
 "and sets), and they cause him to rise in NUT. And 
 " they say their words of power which are these : — ' Out 
 " upon thee, thou Eebel Serpent ! Out upon thee, 
 " thou monster tlmt destroyest, thou Apep that sendest 
 " forth thy evil emanations (or, deeds) ! Thy face shall 
 " be destroyed, Apep. Thou shalt advance to the 
 " block of execution. The Nemu are against thee, and 
 " they shall hack thee in pieces. The Aaiu are against 
 "thee, and they shall destroy thee. The Abebuiti 
 " (i.e., the three spearmen) shall drive [their harpoons] 
 " into thee, and they shall enchant thee by means of 
 " their Hail ! Thou art destroyed, dashed in pieces, 
 " and stubbe<l to dcatli, serpent Sessi.' " 
 
 "Those wh<j are in this scene, and who have their
 
 THE GODS OF THE SOUTH 245 
 
 "spears, keep ward over the rope of Ai, and they do 
 "not permit this Worm to approach the Ijoat of the 
 "great god. They pass behind this god upwards. 
 "These gods who do battle on behalf of this god in 
 " heaven say " : — (The speech is wanting), 
 
 ^ -MMri I 1^-^ yvwvwv 11 1 1 Mil 
 
 ^. I I I ^VW\ i MAA^ 
 
 Gods of the South raising the Standard of the South. 
 
 In the upper register are the following : — 
 1. Four gods, who in the place of heads have each a 
 crown of the South, to whicli is aflixed a uraeus, upon 
 his body, and who, aided Ijy a bearded male figure, are 
 engaged in raising up from the ground, by means of a 
 rope, a pole or staff, which is surmounted by a bearded
 
 246 NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 human head wearing a crown of the South ; the gods 
 are called " gods of the South," | 1 i ^ 5 ^i^d the 
 bearded male figure "he who is over the front end," 
 
 2, Four gods, who in the place of heads have each a 
 
 « t I 
 
 '-"^^ c^Z AVMMA <z::^ ^T^ Ti_ _'^> Aww\ i I 
 • • J 1 1 1 1 'vvwvAA CZZ ^ ^ M — ^ <iM Jl 
 
 (11^ -tm- czrr ^-A, yi. r 
 
 
 Gods of the North raising the Standard of the Nortl 
 
 crown of the North, to which is aflixed a uraeus, upon 
 his Ijody, and who, aided by a bearded male figure, are 
 engaged in raising up from the ground, by means of a 
 rope, a pole or staff, which is surmounted l)y a l)eardcd 
 Iiuman head wearing a crown of the North ; the gods
 
 HORUS-SET AND HERU-AM-UAA 247 
 
 are called "gods of the North," | i ^^, and the 
 bearded male figure is " he who is over the hind part," 
 
 3. Between the two groups described above is 
 the hawk - lieaded 
 
 sphinx which typi- .'/. » "'•',*.* * *'•'/ •* ;*'*•'•* •* *.*•> • '\\' ' 
 fies "Horus in the r''.\'>:\'.- ^ y :«:\Mv;'': vW/; 
 
 ywwww '^^ ^J^\ I 
 
 I I » *™^ •■ m 
 
 Boat 
 
 Above its hind - 
 quarters spring the 
 head and shoulders 
 of a bearded human 
 figure called Ana, 
 wwNA ^ and on the 
 
 head of the liawk 
 and that of Ana 
 is a crown of the 
 South. Standing 
 on the back of tlie 
 
 sphinx is the figure Ueruam-uaa with SetUorus ou his back. 
 
 of Horus-Set witli 
 
 t'haracteristic heads, with his arms outstretched, and 
 with each hand laid upon the upper part of the crowns 
 of the South. The hawk liead of this figure faces the 
 back of tlie liawk head of the sphinx, and the animal's 
 head, which is cliaracteristic of Set, faces the back of 
 the human head of Ana. It is thus quite clear that
 
 248 NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 Horns was regarded as a form of the Sun-god of the 
 South, and Set as a form of the Sun-god of the North. 
 
 4. The serpent Shemti, r-vn V\ , which has four 
 
 heads and necks at each end of its body, and each head 
 and neck are supported on a pair of legs. A male 
 
 figure called Apu, \/ ^j stands and grasps the 
 
 middle of the body of the serpent with both hands. 
 
 5. Tlie serpent Bata, J (1 ^ , with a bearded head 
 
 at eacli end of his body ; each head wears a crown of 
 the South. Above the back of this serpent is another 
 serpent, from each end of tlie body of which spring the 
 upper portions of the bodies and heads of four bearded 
 male figures ; the first figure of each group has a pair 
 of hands and arms which are raised in adoration, and 
 each figure of the two groups has a pair of legs, which 
 rest on the back of the serpent Bata. A male figure 
 called Abetii stands and grasps the middle of the 
 
 body of the serpent Tepi, ^ !1 (] , with both hands. 
 
 (i. Two male beings, swinging over their heads a net, 
 wherewith they are going to attack the serpent, or to 
 resist him. 
 
 The text wliich refers to the aljove reads : — 
 
 /VS/W\A I I 
 
 
 AAA/WA 
 
 I ^ D /VWWN 1 I I III 1 I I I Sll I <= 
 
 /WSf^V\ I I I
 
 THE SHEMTI SERPENT 
 
 249 
 
 
 ^^A^m^ii^A^m^^i 
 
 I I I I 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 I I I I /\/V\f\/V\ 
 
 I I I 
 
 A 
 
 Sim iflVuuu 
 
 • \\ 
 
 a, |-j ^j 
 
 I .V\/W\A ^ I J I 
 
 The Sheuiti SerpoLt and his warder Apu. 
 
 1 
 
 <? 
 
 
 
 ^"^^^ 1 I I I iiJ 111 1 I 1 1 I I I mi D LU 1 I I 
 
 V g S '''-WW 
 
 1 I I <::^ 
 
 I I I f\rj\r^/^ 
 fvw^/v\ I I I 
 
 <0 C£ £1^ /^AAAW^
 
 250 
 
 NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 ^ &. 
 
 I A^'/v^^ 
 
 1 ^'I^lP^^ 
 
 \^Z2 
 
 J] ^ 
 
 I I I ^ I 1 1 1 O 
 
 11^^ 
 
 o w 
 
 
 
 I D 
 
 ^ © ^ 
 
 I ^ I -*- — r- 
 
 I I I 11 I ^J 
 
 mjl|3.m(l-[)-i 
 
 AA/\AAA 
 I I I 
 
 <=^ w 
 
 ^ 
 
 (2 111 
 
 ?^ S /wvw.C^£^ A III I I I 
 
 I A/VWV\ 
 
 'J'lic passage which refers to the gods of the South 
 reads : — 
 
 "Those who are in tliis scene rise up for Pia, wlio
 
 THE SERPENTS DATA AND TEPI 25I 
 
 " saith unto thcin : — ' Keceive ye your heads, ye gods, 
 " and draw tightly the front end of your rope. Hail, 
 " ye gods, come into being ! Hail, possess ye the 
 " power of light, ye gods, and come ye into l^eing, 
 " ye gods. Possess ye tlfe power of light, ye gods, by 
 
 .-:. ;.- • • ,•. • '!••.*.••••••••. *•.•,-«•? 
 
 '] ho Stipeiils Kuta and Toi)i and the warder Abeth. 
 
 *' my coming into being in the secret place, and by my 
 
 "power of liglit in the hidden place (Anient), in the 
 
 " cliambers of things.' " 
 
 The passage which refers to Horus-Set reads :— 
 "Ra maketli to arise this god. This god with his 
 
 " two faces gocth in after Eii hath passed by him."
 
 252 NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 The passage which refers to the gods of the North 
 reads : — 
 
 " Ka saith unto them : — ' Let your heads be to 
 " you, ye gods ! Eeceive ye your crowns of 
 " the North, and pull ye "tightly at the hinder 
 "end of the boat of him that cometh into being 
 "from mo. Behold now Horus of the handsome 
 " Face ! ' " 
 
 The passage which refers to the serpent Shemti 
 reads : — 
 
 " He who is in this picture strideth through the secret 
 " place, and lie withdrawetli to Qa-temt, the Hall (or, 
 " Court) of Anient. Those who are in it are the heads 
 " which have been devoured, and they breathe the 
 " odour of Shemti, of which Apu is the warder." 
 
 The passage which refers to the serpent Bata 
 reads : — 
 
 " He who is in this picture maketh his rising up for 
 " Sak, and he keepeth count of the souls which are 
 " doomed in the Tuat. He strideth through the secret 
 "place, and he withdrawetli to Tesekt-baiu, to the 
 " Hall (or, Court) of Anient ; then Tepi entereth into 
 " Bata. Those who arc in it are they whose heads 
 " liave been devoured. They breathe tlie odour of 
 " Bata, of which Abetii is the guardian." 
 
 The passage which refers to the two gods with nets 
 reads : — 
 
 "These are the gods who make use of words of 
 " power for Horus-lla in Anient. [They have power]
 
 THE GODS WITH NETS 253 
 
 " over the net, and they make use of words of power on 
 " those who are in the net[s] which are in their hands." 
 
 In the lower register are : — 
 
 1. Sixteen gods, who stand at one end of the scene, 
 and grasp a rope with both hands. The first four 
 are bearded, man- 
 headed beings, and 
 are said to be " the 
 souls of Anient," 
 ' I 
 
 :^7>7 
 
 > • • * • « % » 
 
 
 the second four 
 are ibis - headed, 
 and are " the fol- 
 lowers of Thoth," 
 
 the third four 
 are hawk-headed, 
 and are " the fol- 
 lowers of Horus," 
 
 r Jr 1 ©^m' 
 
 and the last four 
 
 are ram-headed, and are "the followers of Ea," 
 
 2. Eight bearded, man-headed beings, who stand at 
 the other end of the scene in two groups of four, and 
 
 who are described as " Towers," 'Y' ® ^ (] (] % ^r^ J 5 
 
 Two goJa with nets.
 
 2 54 
 
 NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 each grasps a rope with both hands. The rope which 
 is held by these groups of beings is attached to tlie 
 
 legs of the enormous serpent Kiiepki, O (1(1 ; . 
 
 This serpent has a head at each end of its body, 
 the foremost part of which is supported on a pair 
 of human legs ; from each end of that portion of its 
 body which lies flat on the ground springs a uraeus. 
 On the centre fold of the body is seated a hawk, which 
 
 wears on its head the double crown, rJ . This hawk 
 
 is the symbol of " Horus of the Tuat," Hern fnatl 
 
 £55 
 
 ^ W* 
 
 The text which refers to this section of the scene 
 reads : — 
 
 /\A/WV\ I 1 I 
 
 D ^^ 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 
 [O] 
 
 I I I- fl 
 
 ^ 
 
 i 
 
 .1'^#rr;Ti^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 ocrsc 
 
 
 D I 
 
 AAAA/V\ 
 
 O I 
 
 v^^^T^V 
 
 I I I 
 
 A 
 
 ® II 
 
 j\ 
 
 \ 
 
 o 5il^^ Jl? 2*^=^
 
 cr^ A 
 S® II 
 
 THE TOWERS OF KHEPRI 
 
 255 
 
 I I I 
 
 J\ I 
 
 ira(iyi^r^^i!:af^^i 
 
 w 
 
 nil I I 
 
 I a i=s: 
 
 v^ I :pti /. z^^ Aww* U)^.' j^I^T ^ m ViL^^^'^'^<=> IL r 
 
 ^ J^ r^ i ^ iii^»Aiyf ^:^'J"^ if I 
 
 ^ AA/x*^,^-^'*^ <=> v«ww\ >«*«^ •> ^ ^ .L^.; * — * *> 
 
 * ' 
 
 ^Tbe Souls of Anient, and tlie Followers of Thotli who tow Khepri. 
 
 I A,V\^W\ '^ W J\ 
 
 ^ 
 
 AM^J^ 
 
 A n o c±G 
 
 JTflfelL!! 
 
 
 JJ I 
 
 v^ ^/v^AAA
 
 256 
 
 NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 ii^qqmqv 
 
 
 o 
 
 iiiiimi 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^ III ^ 
 
 1 H 
 
 .III P-^ 
 
 J\ ^^ I 
 
 I /wwv, r^^^ 
 
 ^(jraqq^f^lg 
 
 ^is-^ 
 
 t??^-.^*lJ-l^.^iii:nft?Tl 
 
 t i 
 
 AMVMM 
 
 *•*• *' *-'' 
 
 The Followers of Uonis and the Followers of Rii who tow Khepri. 
 
 "Those who are in tliis scene have the rope in their 
 " liands, and it is fastened to the leg[s] of Khepri, who 
 " moveth backwards to the Hall of their horizon. They 
 " draw this rope with tlie god into their horizon, and 
 " they tow liini along in the sky (Nut). Tliey live npon 
 " tlic tilings of the Sonth, and their snstcnancc is from 
 "the things of tlic Nortli, [and tliey exist] on tliatwliicli
 
 KHEPRI AND IIORUS OF THE TUAT 
 
 257 
 
 " Cometh fortli from the mouth of IiA. The voice of 
 " this serpent Kiiepiji goeth round about and travelleth 
 " into the secret place after Ra hath entered into the 
 " height of heaven." 
 
 The four groups, each containing four beings, "say 
 " unto Ra : — ' Come, come, after thy transformations ! 
 " Come, Ra, after tliy transformations ! Appear, 
 
 
 
 
 ' ' ' • ' — '•♦'*•* •>•» .»..'. »•■•....«> .> .t. .» 
 
 The Serjient Khepri and Horns of the Tuat. 
 
 " appear, after thy transformations ! Appear, Ra, 
 "after thy transformations in heaven, in the great 
 " heaven ! Hail ! We decree for thee thy habitations 
 " by the excellence which is in the words of the Mighty 
 " One of Forms in the secret (or, hidden) place.' " 
 The passage which refers to Horus reads : — 
 " He who is in this scene is IIeku Tuati (i.e., Horus 
 VOL. II. s
 
 258 NINTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " of the Tiiat). The head cometh forth from him, 
 "and the forms [in which he appeareth] from the 
 "coiled [serpent]. Ra, crieth unto this god to whom 
 " the two divine Uraei unite themselves ; he entereth 
 " in upon the way into Khepki, who listeneth when Ea 
 " crieth to him." 
 
 The two groups, each containing four heings, " have 
 
 
 
 The Eit,'ht Powers who tow Khopri. 
 
 "in tlieir hands the ro})C wliicli is fastened to tlie foot 
 "of KiiErKi, aiid tlioy say to llfi: — 'The ways of the 
 "hidden place are o])en to thee, and [the portals] whicli 
 " arc in the earth are unfolded for thee, the Soul whicli 
 " Nut loveth, and we will guide thy wings to the moun- 
 " tain. Hail ! Enter thou into the East, and make thou 
 " thy passage from between tlie tliighs of tliy motlicr.'"
 
 ( 259 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 THE GATE OF SETHU. 
 
 The Tenth Division of the Tuat. 
 
 Having passed through the Ninth Division of the Tuat, 
 the boat of tlie sun arrives at the gateway Tcheserit, 
 
 \=J^ (1(1 ^ which leads to the Tenth Division, or, 
 
 as the opening text reads: -^ 1 j 
 
 ^ □ ~>_.^^n |G- [] i D - 
 
 A/^W>A |1 
 
 AAWVv 
 
 /\rvw\/\ U 
 
 1 ' ° ^ 1 ' 1 "If^ ' ""^' " ^^^^^ g^'®^^ so J Cometh 
 
 I /VWV^A AA/VNAA I 111 I U _Z1 I 
 
 " forth to this gate, and entereth through it, and the 
 "gods who are therein acckim the great god." The 
 gateway is like that through wliieh the god passed into 
 the previous Division, and its outwork is guarded by 
 sixteen uraei. At the entrance to tlie gate proper 
 
 stands a bearded, mummied form called Nemi, (0(1, 
 
 who holds a knife in his hands, and at its exit stands 
 
 a similar mummied form called Kefi, (1(1. The 
 
 corridor is swept by flames of fire, which proceed from 
 the mouths of two uraei, as before. The uraei which
 
 26o 
 
 TENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 guard the outwork address Ra, and say, " Come thou to 
 " us, thou wlio art at tlie head of the horizon, thou 
 "great god who openest the secret place, open thou 
 " the holy pylons and unfold the portals of the earth," 
 \\ <c=><==> <£? ao=> C30 -nmiir n © ni 
 
 Q 
 
 \=^ 
 
 
 iiiiiiiir 
 
 The monster serpent which 
 
 The Boat nf Af-Ra in the Tenth Division of the Tunt. 
 
 stands on his tail and guards the dour is called Setiiu, 
 
 I , and the two lines of text whicli refer to his 
 1 (5 ' 
 
 adndssion of lia read : — " He who is over this gate 
 " opcneth to Ha. Sa saith unto Setiiu, ' Open thy 
 "gate, unfold thy portal, so tliat lie may illumine the 
 " thick darkness, and may send liglit into tlie liidden 
 "al)ode.' This gate closeth after the great god hath
 
 
 ,vvww\ 
 
 r.l 
 
 ^2* 
 
 ' « I' • 1 I l U ifc. 
 
 The Gate of the Serpent Scthu.
 
 262 TENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " passed through it, and the uraei who are on the other 
 " side of it wail when they hear it closing upon them," 
 
 D O 
 
 
 (]4IQ^^, ^ ran I. 
 
 1 U I ^ _B^ 1 I I "mmnr ^/^ww 
 
 In the middle of this Division we see the ])oat of the 
 sun Ijeing towed on its way by four gods of the 'Puat, 
 
 ^ I ; tlie god is in the same form as before, and his 
 ^ \\ I ' ° 
 
 boat is piloted by Sa, who commands, and by Heka, 
 who steers according to his directions. 
 
 The procession in front of the boat of the sun 
 consists of : — 
 
 1. A bearded male figure called Unti, ^^ 4- , 
 
 ^ w ' 
 
 i.e., the "god of the hour," who holds a star in each 
 hand. 
 
 2. Four knceliug gods, each with a uraeus over his 
 
 head. The first is noitus, Vk,? hawk-lieaded ; the 
 
 second is Sereq, ""^^^ ^ ^ , Itcardcd, and wearing a wig; 
 the third is Abesh, bearded and without a wig; and 
 tlie fourth is Sekiiet, y 5 ^^'i^^^ ^^^^ hcixd of a 
 lioness.
 
 THE GODS WHO LIGHT THE SKY 263 
 
 3. Three bearded beings, the "Star-gods," >k 111) i, 
 
 each holding a star in his right hand, which is stretched 
 aloft, and with his left towing a small boat containing 
 the "Face of the Disk." 
 
 4. A small boat holding a nracus, which has the 
 latter part of its body bent npwards ; within the curve 
 
 is the " Face of tlie Disk," "^ [1 ^^^^ . 
 
 5. The winged serpent Semi, standmg on its tail, 
 with its body in folds. 
 
 6. The bearded figure Besi, J ' (IU5 receiving in his 
 
 hand tlie flame which spouts up from the head of a 
 horned animal, which forms the top of a staff, and is 
 transfixed by a knife. 
 
 (111, from each side of 
 
 the neck of which grows a bearded, mimimy figure. 
 
 8. Four women, each with both hands raised in 
 
 adoration ; they are described as " Criers," C^ ij "^ 1 • 
 
 9. Two bows, set end to end, ^^^-ss^', on each of 
 which three uraei rear their heads. Standing over the 
 place where the two ends of the bows meet, with a foot 
 on the end of each, is the two-headed figure HoRUS- 
 Set, with two pairs of hands, one pair on each side 
 of his body, raised in adoration. Horus-Set is called 
 
 " he of the two heads," ^^ , and the two bows are 
 
 W ' 
 
 " the Crown of the Uraei," °^ t\ ^ 1) w.
 
 264 
 
 TENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 The text which refers to the above groups reads : — 
 
 I W^VW\ — n A/VW^ I I I I 1 
 
 
 ?^ 
 
 -»— — (&- 
 
 
 
 Aw^A^ 1 1 I y^ 1 I I I 
 
 O I 
 
 lllllllll Q I 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ w 
 
 / — I* CM^ 
 
 
 O 
 
 A^/VV^A /W\/VNA 
 
 o 
 
 ■A' 
 
 o 
 
 LraJ 
 
 D 
 
 ^ q D ^'^^^ ^ -<2>- 
 o I ^ — -.4—0 ^— ^ 
 
 1 
 
 D 
 
 <^>^ III 
 
 H 
 
 ^tijrrA 
 
 — M — AAftA^^ 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 A^/wv^ 
 
 I I I D 7\ 
 
 ^ 
 
 I lO 
 
 I o /I\ .^^ 
 
 ! ^ ^ rrv-i 
 
 (7) t^^'^'-^i A/^^AA yi 
 
 I L) X "^ '^ /WVV\A nU 
 
 I Q AA/WW 111'^ A^yWW 
 
 I (^ A ^^^ ^ MM II 
 
 i^f^(]^Y 
 
 ft 
 
 ci I <c=r> JJi 
 
 
 O I 
 
 JIX ^ 
 
 tJ:A' 
 
 >^w^^v^ ^ I /vV^^VsA LA-i 11 M 
 
 AAAA*V\ ; 
 
 1 
 
 ^^2 © 
 
 o 
 
 Vs/Vs/VS III I 
 
 I I I ^<^ 
 
 O I /I Ji I 
 
 raiie^i?fly
 
 THE GODS WHO LIGHT THE SKY 265 
 
 ^ 
 
 ra 
 
 -'-' _ ^'^x. >=*>- 1"^^*^ r/wvw -^ 
 
 
 <=> ^1 I COj I J F=q i±±ii -A I I I <=> I I I ^^-.^ 
 
 " This great god is towed along by the gods of the 
 " Tuat, and those who tow Ea along say : — ' We are 
 " towing Ra along, we are towing Ra along, and Ra 
 " fulloweth [us] into Nut. have the mastery over 
 " thy Face, indeed thou shalt unite thyself to thy Face, 
 " Ra, [by] Maat. Open, thou Face of Ra, and let 
 " the two Eyes of Khuti enter into thee ; drive away 
 " thou the darkness from Amentet. Let him give liglit 
 " by what he hath sent forth, the liglit.' " 
 
 Of the god with stars it is said : — 
 
 " He maketh a rising up for Ra (or, he stablisheth 
 " Ra), Unti makctli to be light tlie upper heaven ; this 
 "god leadeth the hour, which performeth that which 
 " belongeth to it to do." 
 
 Of the four seated gods it is said : — 
 
 " The [four] serpents who are in the earth keep ward 
 "over those who are in this picture. They make a 
 " rising up fur Ra, and they sit upon the great image[s 
 " which are] under them, and they pass onwards with 
 " them in the following of Ra, together with the hidden 
 " images which belong to them."
 
 266 
 
 TENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 Of the three gods who hold stars it is said : — 
 "Those who are in this picture sing hymns with 
 " their stars, and they grasp firmly the bows of their 
 " boat, [and it] entereth into Nut. And this Face of 
 "Ea moveth onwards, and saileth over the land, and 
 " those who are in the Tuat sing hymns to it, and make 
 " Ra to stand up (i.e., establish Ea)." 
 Of the winged serpent Semi it is said : — 
 " [It maketh a rising up for Ea], and it guideth the 
 
 Gods of Liyht aud Fire. Star-gods. Face of the Disk, Semi. 
 
 " Well-doing god into the Tuat of the horizon of the 
 " East." 
 
 Of the god Besi it is said : — 
 
 "He maketh a rising up for Ea, and lie i»lacet]i fire 
 " on the head and horns (or, [in] his hands is the fire 
 " from the head and horns), and the weapon which is in 
 " tlie hand of the Fighter is in the follower of this god." 
 
 Of the r.raeus with the double male figure it is 
 said : — 
 
 "It maketli a rising up for Ea. Tlie stablishing of
 
 MEHEN AND HORUS-SET 267 
 
 " Time which is reckoned in writing by years is with 
 " this uraeus, and it maketh it to go with liini into the 
 " heights of heaven." 
 
 Of the " Criers " it is said : — 
 
 " Those who cry unto Ea say, ' Enter in, Ha ! 
 " Hail, come, Ra ! Hail, come, thou who art born 
 " of the Tuat ! Come, offspring of the heights of 
 " heaven ! Hail, come thou into being, Ea ! ' " 
 
 ^' ■=> m ~A = =^ I "tf" 5> 1 r\- «=• S^ 
 
 • — "■ ^^ ■ £\.i // I ^ I P"^ ^^ •«=>f '^ *■ — ^ * 
 
 Besi. Aukhi. The goddesses who hail the god. Meheu aud llorus-Set. 
 
 Of the double bow it is said : — 
 
 "This is the Mehen serpent of the uraci, which 
 "strideth through the Tuat. The two bows are 
 " stretched out, and they bear up on themselves him of 
 " tlie Two-Faces (or, Two-Heads, i.e., Horus-Set) in his 
 "mystery which [ai)pertaineth] to them. They lead 
 " the way for Ea in the horizon of the east of heaven, 
 "and they pass on into the heights of heaven in his 
 " train."
 
 268 
 
 TENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 In the upper register are : — 
 1. The four Antiu 2;ods, 
 
 , each of whom 
 
 holds a knife in his riglit hand, and a short staff with 
 one end curved and curled in his left. 
 
 2. The four Henatiu gods, | ^ '^ ^^1 ^' ^^^^^ 
 having four uraei in the place of a head ; they are 
 armed with weapons similar to those of the Antiu gods. 
 
 The Anliu and Ilcnatiu Gods attacking Apep. 
 
 3. Tlic undulating length of the serpent Apep, 
 
 D D' 
 of whom it is said, "his voice goeth round the Tuat," 
 
 K^^. _B^ iir=i' 
 
 Attached to the neck of the 
 
 monster is a very long chain, which rises in an oval 
 curve, and, passing along tlirougli the liands of sixteen 
 male figures, is then grasped and licld tlown liy a large 
 hand, from which it again rises in an oval curve, and 
 passing on for some distance descends into the earth
 
 THE CHILDREN OF HORUS FETTER APEP 269 
 
 immediately in front of Khcnti-Amenti. On tlie first 
 curve of tlie chain, lying fiat on her face, is the goddess 
 Serq. Of the sixteen bearded figures who grasp the chain 
 
 M f) [^ I 
 
 with ]ioth hands, four are called Setefiu, '=^ 
 
 and face to the left ; the twelve are described as the 
 
 "TCHATIU gods, strong of arm,"'^'^'^ i"^^^^ ^^\ 
 
 I . The right hand which grasps and pulls down 
 
 the chain is called " Hidden Body," h ^^ ) j^ j . 
 
 Lengthwise on the second curve of the great chain 
 lean the upper porticjns of the figures of five gods, 
 each of whom grasps the chain with his right hand, 
 and holds in his left a sceptre and the end of a 
 chain which fetters a serpent in coils. The name of 
 the first serpent is Uamemti, -Tl / \:zzj , but of the 
 
 remaining four no names are given. The five f'ods 
 appear to grow out of the great chain, and are called 
 
 SeB, "^ J,Me.ST, ^, HaPI, ^t\l\, TUAMUTEF, 
 
 ^^ , and Qebiisennuf, [5||}^^^^. At the end 
 
 of this section of the scene stands the bearded 
 mummied figure of Khenti-Amenti, wearing the White 
 Crown and the mendt, and holding the sceptre 1 in his 
 two hands. 
 
 The text which refers to these groups reads : — 
 
 AA/VsAA 
 
 I I I 
 
 n 
 
 8 r AAAAAA ^"^ / 
 
 I /.wvAA I I I 1 G I a o I J^
 
 270 
 
 TENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 A/^VvNA n 1 I C^l 
 
 1 
 
 AV'AA/v\ 
 (3 111 
 
 I II O I I ^ W — 
 Qg^ O I 
 
 I I I 
 
 ^ O 
 
 I I I D D 
 
 A D 
 
 V^ 
 
 D D 
 
 J 
 
 ^00 I 
 
 "^^ -^*- "==^^ 
 
 
 
 D 
 
 ^i^s-^p^:^q^¥i 
 
 D 
 
 Hil'^rn 
 
 
 ^^^ 7;(i1)(fl) /I /w^AA^ 
 
 I D o^ 
 
 I yy^ Q 
 
 I 'v_ L) L) AAA/VV\ _/i I AA^VWA 
 
 q I D 
 
 I AA^VWS 
 
 O I j^ 
 
 
 i f 
 
 > I I I ^^.=^ I 
 
 a ^ 
 
 © 
 
 D D 
 
 I a (2 , ^ ^ w 
 
 I 
 
 I /= 
 
 
 F^ 
 
 
 I I I 
 
 A/^VVV\ 
 I I I 
 
 ^(2 111 
 
 111 (2 III 
 
 f\ 
 
 I w I o 
 
 A/VWNA 
 
 C^:^ 
 
 ^ W II I
 
 ^-^ %\ AAAAAA o \ 4; n (? 
 
 '^^^(^ 111 1 I 
 
 THE SETEFIU GODS 27I 
 
 I A/VWVi *— ' I /VVWV\ ( I *~ ^ U I M\N\N\ It % l l 1 1 I 
 
 
 The Setofin and other gods holdinjj Apep in restraint. 
 
 Of the eight gods (i.e., the Antiu and Henatiu) it is 
 said : — 
 
 " Those who are in this pictnre rise up (or, stand) for 
 "Ea, and Ea riseth and cometh fortli for them, [and 
 " they say], ' Eise, Ea, be strong, Khuti ; verily we will 
 " overthrow Apep in his fetters. Approach not thou, 
 " Ea, towards thine enemy, and thine enemy shall 
 "not approach thee; may thy holy attributes come 
 " into being within the serpent. The^^serpent Apep is
 
 272 
 
 TENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " stabbed with his knives, and gashes are inflicted on 
 "him. Eu shall stand up in the hour wherein he is 
 " content (or, the hour of peace), and the great god 
 " shall pass on in strength when his chain (i.e., Apep's) 
 " is fixed.' " 
 
 " The reptile (literally, worm) who is in this picture 
 " breaketh asunder the fetters, and the boat of this 
 "great god beginneth [to move] towards the region 
 
 
 Seb and tlie Ohililren of Tlnrns lioldint,'- Apep and liis sons in restraint. 
 
 " of Apep ; this great god travelleth on after he (i.e., 
 " Apep) hath been put in restraint by means of his 
 " fetters." 
 
 Of the four Setefiu gods it is said : — 
 
 " Those who are in this picture grasp the fetters of 
 " the being of two-fold evil, and they say to Ea, ' Come 
 " forward, Ra, pass onwards, Khuti. Verily fetters 
 "have been laid upon Neiia-iira, and A})Cp is in his 
 " Ijonds.' "
 
 THE GODDESSES OF THE HOURS 273 
 
 Of the twelve other gods who grasp the chain it is 
 said : — 
 
 " Those who are in this picture [act] as warders of 
 " the sons of the helpless one, and they keep guard 
 " over the deadly chain which is in the Hidden Hand, 
 " for the dead bodies are placed with the things [which 
 " belong to them] in the circuit of the battlements of 
 " Kiienti-Amenti. And these gods say, ' Let darkness 
 " bo upon thy face, Uamemti, and ye shall be 
 "destroyed, ye sons of the helpless one, by the 
 " Hidden Hand, wliich shall cause evils [to come upon 
 " you] by the deadly chain which is in it. Seb keepeth 
 " ward over your fetters, and the sons of the fetters 
 " (i.e., Mest, Hapi, Tuamutef, and Qebhsennuf) put 
 " upon you the deadly chain. Keep ye [your] ward 
 " under the reckonhig of Khenti-Amenti.' " 
 
 Of the children of Horus it is said : — 
 
 "Those who are in this picture make heavy the 
 " fetters of the sons of the helpless one, and the boat of 
 " the Well-doing God travelleth on its way." 
 
 In the lower register are : — 
 
 1. Twelve male beings, each of whom carries a 
 l)addle ; they are called " gods who never diminish," 
 
 2. Twelve female beings, each of whom grasps a rope 
 with both hands ; above the head of each is a star. They 
 are called the " hours who tow along [the boat of Ea]," 
 
 i I 
 O ci O III s==» -M^ 11 <$. 1 
 
 VOL. II. T
 
 274 TENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 3. The u;od Banti, /wwv^, with the head of a 
 
 * ^ Q w' 
 
 cynocephalus ape, holding a sceptre, 1 . 
 
 4. The Q;od Seshsiia, i i man-headed, with a 
 
 star above him, liolding a sceptre, 1 . 
 
 5. The god Ka-Amenti, \_J ft, bull-headed, and 
 holding a sceptre, | . 
 
 
 The Twelve Akhemu-Seku Gods with their Paddles. 
 
 
 ^ , man -headed, with 
 
 6. The god Eenen-sbau, 
 
 a star above him, holding a sceptre, 1 . 
 
 7. A monkey, with a star over his head, standing on 
 a bracket, "" ^' ; he is called the " god of Eethenu " 
 
 (Syria), ^^^. 
 
 8. A 1 )racket, whereon rests the Utchat, ^^ .
 
 THE AKHEMU-SEKU GODS 275 
 
 9. A god called Her-nest-f, f=;i ^~^ ^^-=^ , 
 
 holding a sceptre. 
 
 The text ^vhich refers to the above reads : — 
 
 P^i°Af^ri^m^ili 
 
 AAA/W\ 
 
 III _ 
 
 III / F=^ 
 
 n ^ O CT^ ^:^ 000 Q K.=^^^\jn 
 
 I ^ <CZr> ill ^ A/^/WV AWW\ vjj 
 
 III I Jl t ^F=^<=Z=> ^111^ 
 
 i:^.^^^[0,TJ-F^4n^ mm 
 
 A/V\AAA 
 
 (5 II! <=:^ 
 
 II I I Iw^A^ I I I III I I I <iJ^e 111 11 I 
 
 n I ^ ^^^z::^ 1 I I I lin ^= 1 1 1 ^^^ 111 ,^vwv. ^= 
 
 /WVvV\ 
 
 o i^ ^ 1 1 1 D ^ ^ JL^ -f-r I ^ fl I 
 
 1110^(2111111 
 
 ^ Si (^111 IM®^_^^^-=^ i^<=:=>^ 111 
 
 I I ijo III I <=>i 11 1 M I ^= I (e 111(2
 
 276 TENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 ^ A ^' "imnnr I ^ ^ 1 I ^.^ a^=_ I ^=: 
 
 Of the twelve gods (the Akiiemu Seku) it is said : — 
 " Those who are in this picture make a rising up for 
 " Ea, and tlicy take their paddles in this Circle of 
 " Unti. They come into being of their own accord at 
 " the seasons when Ha is born in Nut ; they come into 
 " being for the births of Ea, and they make their 
 "appearance in Nu along with him. It is they who 
 " transport this great god after he hath taken his place 
 " in the horizon of the East of heaven. Ea saith unto 
 " them : — ' Take ye your paddles and unite ye your- 
 " selves to your stars. Your coming into being taketh 
 " place when [I] come into being, and your births take 
 " place when my births take place. ye beings who 
 " transport me, ye shall not suH'cr diminution, ye 
 " gods Akiiemu Seku.' " 
 
 Of the twelve goddesses of the hours it is said : — 
 " Those who are in this scene take hold of the rope 
 "of the l)oat of Efi to tow him along into the sky. It 
 "is they wlio tow Ea along, and guide him along the 
 " roads into the sky, and behold, they are the goddesses 
 " who draw alony; the threat irod in the Tuat. Ea saith
 
 THE GODDESSES OF THE HOURS 
 
 277 
 
 " unto them : — ' Take ye tlie rope, set ye yourselves in 
 "position, and pull ye nie, my followers, into the 
 "height of lieaven, and lead ye me along the ways. 
 " My births make you to be born, and behold, my 
 " coming into being maketh you to come into being, 
 " stablish ye the periods of time and years for him 
 " who is among you.' " 
 
 1. "The god wlio is in this picture adjureth the 
 
 The Twelve Goddesses of the Uours. 
 
 " pylons to open to Hii, and he goeth on his way by his 
 " side." 
 
 2. " The god who is in this picture crieth out to the 
 " stars concerning the births of this great god, and he 
 " goeth on his way with them." 
 
 3. " The god who is in this picture crieth to the gods 
 "of the Boat of Ea, and he goeth on his way with 
 " him." 
 
 4. " The god who is in this picture setteth the stars
 
 278 
 
 TENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " in their places (literally, towns), and he goeth on his 
 " way with the great god." 
 
 The above four paragraphs must refer to the four 
 gods Banti, Sesiisha, Ka-Ament, and Eenen-sbau, 
 and therefore the god of Rethenu, the Utchat, and the 
 god Her-nest-f remain without descriptions. From 
 the tomb of Eameses VI. M. Lefebure adds the two 
 
 IW 
 
 A.I' 
 
 
 Baiiti. Schhshi. Ka- Reneii- Neter- 
 
 Anienti. sbau. Rethen, 
 
 Eye of Rfi. 
 
 Hei'-nest-f, 
 
 following paragraphs which concern the Utchat and 
 Her-nest-f, f= 
 
 "This is the Eye of Pai, which the god uniteth to 
 " himself, and it rejoiceth in its place in the boat." 
 
 " This is he who openeth the door of this Circle ; he 
 " remaineth in his position, and doth not go on his way 
 " with Ea."
 
 ( 279 ) 
 
 CHArXER XIII. 
 THE GATE OF AM-NETU-F. 
 
 The Eleventh Division of the Tuat. 
 
 Having passed througli the Tenth Division of the 
 Tuat, the Ijoat of the sun arrives at the gateway 
 
 Shetat-besu, -^=f^ 11 , which leads to the 
 
 I Sr=^^ J Mil' 
 Eleventh Division, or, as the opening text reads : 
 
 T °:=i^fli' °(]s/i '1141% in, "This 
 
 " [great] god cometh forth to this gate, this great god 
 "entereth through it, and the gods who are therein 
 "acclaim the great god." The gateway is like that 
 tlu'ough which the god passed into the previous 
 Division ; at the entrance to the gate proper stands 
 
 a bearded, mummied form called Metes, < r-=^ ^'=:>^ , 
 
 and at its exit stands a similar furm called SiietaU, 
 
 ^ . The corridor is swept by flames of fire, 
 
 which proceed from the mouths of two uraei, as before. 
 In the space which is usually guarded l>y a nundjer
 
 280 ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 of gods stand two sceptres, 1 1 , each of which is 
 
 surmounted by a White Crown ; the one on the right 
 
 is the symbol of Osiris, ^ (Sai;), and the other of 
 
 HoEUS, ^^^^. Between the sceptres is a line of text, 
 
 which reads : — " They say to Ea, ' [Come] in peace ! 
 " [Come] in peace ! [Come] in peace ! [Come] in peace ! 
 " thou whose transformations are manifold, thy soul 
 " is in heaven, thy body is in the earth. It is thine 
 
 AAAA/^ A^^^/\/\ 
 
 " own command, G;reat one," [I t;:^^ r\ — ^^ r— ^>— . 
 
 The monster serpent which stands on his tail and 
 
 guards the door is called Am-netu-f, \\- - ,•'" ^'^-=— , 
 
 and the two lines of text which refer to his admission 
 of Efi read : — " He who is over this door openeth to Ra. 
 " Sau saith to Am-netu-f, ' Open thy gate to Ea, unfold 
 " thy portal to Kiiuti, so that he may illumine the 
 " thick darkness, and may send light into the hidden 
 "abode.' This gate closcth after the great god hatli 
 " i)assed through it, and the gods who are on the battle- 
 "ments wail when tliey hear it closing upon them," 
 
 Illllllll lllllllll A/wvw ■■^^^ W I IT ^ i 1 I 
 
 A^VW\A 
 
 Cl) 1 A/WVV\ 
 
 ■mmnr imnnr /vwvw ^^ ^ 1 IT ^ i 1 I ilu^ imnr i i
 
 c\. 
 
 L?1 
 
 AWVWV 
 MVWWt 
 
 
 r, 
 
 .r 
 
 ;.,r 
 +1 
 
 it" 
 
 
 t^ 
 
 I i I 
 
 I • 
 
 & o 
 
 // o 
 
 it 
 
 9 - 
 
 oWo 
 
 ■sU-I 
 
 I • 
 
 
 X - 
 
 The Gate; of .the Serpent Am-netu-f.
 
 282 
 
 ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 (jSglj 
 
 lllllllll 
 
 .1 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 1 
 
 unnnr 
 A\ D. 
 
 In the middle of this Division we see the boat of the 
 sun being towed on its way by four gods of the Tuat, 
 
 ^ I ; the god is in the same form as before, and his 
 
 '*"! ^ X OS**** * <^> •••*=»■ -^i^ 111^ 1:^^^ • 
 
 n « -S- Avwwv l_-c I • Val Wvy <o^ '''''^ c-a '^r*^. 
 
 I I I ' JVWWrt I ■ — ■ 
 
 Tlie Boat of Af-Rfi in the Eleventh Division of the Tuat. 
 
 boat is piloted by Sa, who commands, and l»y TIeka, 
 wlio steers according to his directions. 
 
 The procession in front of the boat of the sun 
 consists of : — 
 
 1. A company of nine gods, each holding a huge 
 
 knife in his right hand, and a sceptre, L in his left; 
 
 the first four have jackal heads, and the last five heads 
 of bearded men. Tlicse niue beings represent the
 
 THE SLAUGHTERERS OF APEP 28$ 
 
 _ ^_ _^ .._., 0!!! ^! 
 
 "company of the gods who slay Apep," '^iii 
 
 D D_ 
 2. The serpent Apep, fettered by five chains which 
 
 enter the ground ; the fetters are further strengthened 
 
 by small chains, which are linked to the larger ones, 
 
 and are fastened to the ground by means of pegs with 
 
 a hook at the top, 1. In an earlier picture we have 
 
 ±^'iiiii I i^rSf fmi /C« •.^'^ •fS^Wal 
 
 y* .III '^^ Avwxp 
 
 The Slaughterers of Apep. 
 
 seen Apep fettered by Seb, Mest, Hapi, Tuamutef, and 
 Qebhsennuf, who were represented by five gods, but 
 here the figures of the gods are wanting, and it is only 
 
 the legend "Children of Horus," H I ^^ Jj I , that tells 
 
 us the chains represent the gods. 
 
 3. Four Apes, /vwvna ^ ^ i ^ each holding up a huge 
 
 hand and wrist.
 
 284 
 
 ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 4. The goddess of Upper Egypt, wearing the Wliite 
 Crown, and styled Amenti, ft . 
 
 5. The goddess of Lower Egypt, wearing the Eed 
 
 I 
 
 Crown, and called Herit, 
 
 6. The bearded god Sebekiiti, 1 J 
 
 ^ \\ 
 
 , who holds 
 
 the emblem of " life " in his right hand, and a sceptre 
 in his left. 
 
 The text which refers to the above gods reads : — 
 
 S^vVNA I 
 
 IIICTZJ I <:^> 
 
 AA/VVV\ / \\ 
 
 ^ 
 
 000 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 (3 000- — ac3 g ^^^ D^^ 
 
 ^^\ I I 
 
 1 
 
 /4 -A I /^W^A 
 
 •Q <=>, 
 
 li^^^iM^^Z^D^^ 
 
 /www 
 
 D 
 
 1^ I 
 
 ^^ — " — ^ 
 
 ^•WW\ 1 1 
 
 III Ji 1 o 
 
 I _ II ... I I I /WV\AA 
 
 I (^ 4 III ^ — I I I 
 
 \r. 
 
 —H A/A/W\ 
 
 /VWS/V\ 
 
 " 1 I I D a 
 
 A^/^A^ — M — 
 
 /WWW 
 
 ^111 
 
 I I I A 111 
 
 9 
 
 r-vr-i 
 fl 
 
 I I I 
 
 
 I* ■=iS>,? I 
 
 1 ° 
 
 I /^/v/W 
 
 o 
 
 K 111 /^= hill I n c^^ I [/wwsa] a ^^=^ J 
 
 j\
 
 I l lllllll fi I "" i Q J^ 
 
 THE ENEMIES OF APEP 
 
 ^. 8 
 
 285 
 
 
 ^ D 
 
 ! □ fh^^S:^ 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 I I I 
 
 w 
 
 1 I I o o 
 
 
 I A/W^A^ 
 
 A,VWNA AAAAA^ 
 
 Z] 
 
 ra 
 
 ^ fill - 
 
 Jl r.^.^-^^ <2 \ I 
 I 
 
 A^/>^V\ »■ 
 
 ^ 111 
 
 o 
 
 II 
 
 ^ n\ Ji F=q^ III I /] ^ Ji I 
 
 1 
 
 I I I 
 
 Ml i I 
 
 U L J AWVW 
 
 ^ w 
 
 A/^^VvA I /VV\AAA 
 
 
 r^^vn 
 
 „ AV^AAA II " . 
 
 ^-^ III '^ I I I /\fW'/V\ U I AAA/^^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 w 
 
 A^^\AAA 
 v5l AAAAAA 
 
 I I I ^ 
 
 P!J 
 
 I I -^^ rn 
 
 .Virr^^^^^^l]' 
 
 Of the gods of the Tuat who tow the boat of Ra it is 
 said : — 
 
 " The gods of the Tuat say, ' Behokl the coming 
 " forth [of Ea] from Ament, and [his] taking up [his] 
 " place in the two divisions of Nu, and [his] perform- 
 " ance of [his] transformations on the two hands of Nu, 
 " This god doth not enter into the height of heaven, 
 
 ' Supplied from CliauipoUiou, Monuments, torn, ii., p. 537.
 
 286 ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " [l)iit] he openeth [a way through] the Tuat into the 
 " height of heaven hy his transformations which are in 
 " Nu. Now, what openeth the Tuat into Nut (i.e., the 
 " sky) are the two hands of Amex-een-f (i.e., he whose 
 " name is hidden). He existeth in the thick darkness, 
 " and light appeareth [there] from the starry night.' " 
 
 Of the nine gods with knives and sceptres it is 
 said : — 
 
 " Those who are in this scene [with] their weapons 
 " in their hand take their knives and hack [with them] 
 " at Apep ; they make gashes in him and slaughter 
 " him, and they drive stakes whereby to fetter him in 
 " the regions which are in the upper height. The 
 " fetters of the Eebel are in the hands of the Children 
 " of Horus, who stand tlireateningly by this god 
 " with their chains between their fingers. This god 
 " reckoneth up his members after he whose arms are 
 " hidden hath opened [the door] to make a way for Ea." 
 
 Of the serpent Apep it is said : — 
 
 "The Children of Horus grasp firmly this serpent 
 " which is in this picture, and in this picture they rest 
 " in Nut (i.e., the sky). They heap their fetters upon 
 "him, and whilst his folds (?) are in the sky his poison 
 " drops down from him into Amentet." 
 
 Of the four apes holding liands it is said : — 
 
 " It is those wlio are in this picture who make ready 
 "for Efi a way into the eastern horizon of licaven, and 
 " they lead the way for the god who hatli created them 
 " with their hands, [standing] two on the right hand
 
 APEP IN FETTERS 287 
 
 " and two on tlio left in the double dtcrt of this god ; 
 
 " then they come forth after him, and sing praises to 
 
 " his soul when it looketh u})on them, and they stahlish 
 
 " his Disk." 
 
 Of the three remaining deities it is said : — 
 
 " Those who arc in this picture turn away Set from 
 
 " this Gate [of the god Tuati. They open its cavern, 
 
 I ** ;i^^ ^Sr ""^ ^ — -^ ^""^ .-^ '"'^ 
 
 AWNVA ^^ I ■ V ^ II—. AWWW p.-^ A n (t7 
 
 •^1 Bill >*wwv\ V I 1 I ^7*" m ^ *=» I \ • 
 
 mAm ''^^^^^ I I » > m^ "^ 
 
 Apep fettered by the chains of Seb and the Children of Horus. 
 
 " and stablish the hidden pylons, and their souls remain 
 
 " in the following of Ra]." 
 
 In the upper register of this Division are : — 
 
 1. I'our gods, each holding a disk in his right hand ; 
 
 these arc " they who hold light-giving disks," ^ V^ 1
 
 288 ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 2. Four gods, each holding a star in his right hand ; 
 these are " they who hold stars," ^ ^ i ^ i . 
 
 3. Four gods, each holding a sceptre, 1, in his left 
 
 hand : these are " they who come forth," IJfl V ^ * 
 
 4. Four ram-headed gods, each holding a sceptre in 
 
 ■■■'■'.. — n — -/^ 
 
 AVWAA •_!_' *VWWA 
 
 I • I 
 
 jt> 5ww« t^ T , ^v^^^ ^^ Jl> • r <=»• ' -^ 
 
 1 • 
 
 L'f] 
 
 I I I « I e. ' ' ■=- "^ "^ A*WW\ AWWyw AWVW\ yyvwMvv 
 
 The Apes who praise Ra. 
 
 Ameijti. Ilerit. Sebekhti. 
 
 his left hand; their names are Ba, "^^, KliNEMU, Q, 
 
 Penter, ^ , and Tent, ^•^^^^ . 
 
 5. Four hawk -headed gods, each holding a sceptre in 
 Ids left hand; tlicse are called lloitus, ^^, Asiiemth, 
 
 ^^V i=5, Sept, A, and Ammi-uaa-f, u -
 
 THE GODS OF THE DAWN 
 
 289 
 
 6. Eight female figures, each seated on a seat formed 
 by a uracils with its body coiled up, and holding a 
 star in her left hand ; these are called " the protecting 
 
 hours 
 
 ■tit 
 
 
 
 7. A crocodile-headed god called Sebek-Ea, who 
 grasps a fold of a serpent that stands on its tail in his 
 right hand, and a sceptre in his left. 
 
 The text which refers to these reads : — 
 
 I Q |-iii m iil| »— rL ^^ /WV^^^ AAA/\AA 
 
 I AAA/V^^ /\IVW\f\ A/V\A/\A 11 /i/,/w\A 
 
 I -^i^ ^-^ lino ?Q ^ 
 
 I I I 
 
 I I I 
 
 '<«' -i I ...... ...... AAAAAA I 
 
 ill^^M^fl^ 
 
 o 
 
 ^ ^^. 
 
 I I I 
 
 p. 
 
 I AAA/VV\ A/V\A/VN ■^'VVN'^A /V 
 
 I <:=>,^-S^ I I I III D 
 
 DOO0 
 
 >k 
 
 111^ III 
 
 ^ 
 
 I I I a M I ^ I 
 
 I I -M^ I <=>U I /ww^^ 1 III 
 
 I AA/VvV\ /\VvV\\ /VWs/V\ ( ^ 
 
 (^ i. nil I I III '::^ III ^^^^ J 2 
 
 A/\AAAA ^ 
 
 ^ D I I I 
 
 1 ' A^I'T^'^^-^^^'^ 
 I iii^Ji I ^w^ Jr ^ 111 D Jr 
 
 o 
 
 VOL. II. 
 
 u
 
 290 
 
 ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 AAAAAA * ' J 
 
 u 
 
 I e 
 
 lip 
 
 ^ I ^ w 
 
 1 
 
 D 
 
 II D ^ 
 
 ^^-mp 
 
 a e 
 
 —» — ^^/^AA^ — « — 
 
 IZITD 
 
 A/WV\A 
 
 ^^ 
 
 /I\ 
 
 I I I M I 
 
 ,,*«*, •,<•• . 
 
 .,,^11; I ..-,", 
 
 ••*••*.*.*•*••* I*' 
 
 ^ *" -f ^* 1 ^'i- 
 
 m 
 
 111 7i 
 
 The gods who bring Disks aud Stars for Ra 
 
 ^ iz: 
 
 ^ \\ 
 
 1 
 
 AAAAAA I f:/V\/\/V\ A^WvAA 
 
 
 tJ' 1 
 
 I ^£3 AAAAAA I 
 I -si) I I I A [ '^' I A^^^/v^A I A^^SAAA 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 T^^ 111 
 
 ^ w 
 
 ^ 
 
 /•A^-^AA A^A/NAA 
 
 V 
 
 I -^ I II 
 
 I ^^^^.^ A^ywv ^v::--^ 
 
 D 
 
 A/VWV\
 
 THE GODS OF THE DAWN 
 
 2gi 
 
 Of the four gods bearing disks it is said : — 
 " Those who are in this picture carry the disk of Ra, 
 " and it is they who make a way through the Tuat and 
 " the height of heaven by means of this image which is 
 "in their hands. They utter words to the Pylon of 
 " Akert so that Ea may set liimself in the body of ISTut 
 " (i.e., the sky)." 
 
 Of the four <i;ods bearing stars it is said : — 
 
 , • .• ; • . J • « 
 
 .•i^i.i.i,. 
 
 , I. . 
 
 The gods; who prepare the Uflermgs and Shrine of Ra, 
 
 "Those who are in this picture carry stars, and 
 " when the two arms c»f Nu embrace Efi they and their 
 " stars shout hynms of praise, and they journey on 
 " with him to the height of lieaven, and they take up 
 " their places in the body of Nut." 
 
 Of the four gods bearing sceptres it is said : — 
 "Those who are in this picture [having] their 
 "sceptres in their hands, are tliey who stablish the
 
 292 ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 "domains of this god in the sky, and they have 
 " their thrones in accordance with the command of 
 " Ea." 
 
 Of the four ram-headed gods it is said : — 
 "Those who are in this picture [having] their 
 "sceptres in their hands, are they who decree [the 
 " making ready] of the offerings of the gods [from] the 
 " bread of heaven, and it is they who make to come 
 " forth celestial water when as yet Eri hath not emerged 
 " in Nu." 
 
 Of the four hawk -headed gods it is said : — 
 "Those who are in this picture [having] their 
 "sceptres in their hands, are they who stablish the 
 " shrine [in the boat of Ka], and they lay their hands 
 "on the body of the double boat of the god after it 
 " hath appeared from out of the gate of Sma, and they 
 "place the paddles [of the boat] in Nut, when the 
 " Hour which presideth over it (i.e., the boat) cometh 
 " into being, and the Hour [which hath guided it] goeth 
 " to rest." 
 
 Of the goddesses who are seated on uraei it is 
 said : — 
 
 " Those who are in this picture with their serpents 
 " under them, and their hands liolding stars, come 
 " forth from the two Atekt of this great god, four to 
 " the East and four to the West ; it is they who call 
 " the Spirits of the East, and they sing hymns to this 
 "god, and they praise him after his appearance, and 
 " Setti cometh forth in his forms. It is they who
 
 THE GODDESSES OF THE ATERTI 
 
 293 
 
 " guide and transport those who are in the boat of this 
 " great god." 
 
 There is no description of the crocodile-headed god 
 Sebek-Eu in the text. 
 
 In the lower register are : — 
 
 1. Four gods, each wearing the Crown of the 
 South ; these are the " Kings of the South in chief," 
 
 M 
 
 ^ 
 
 The goddesses of the Aterti. 
 
 2. Four bearded gods, " the Weepers," h ^=^ J (1(1 ' . 
 
 3. Four gods, each wearing a Crown of the North ; 
 these are the Khxemiu, Q / Vi. 1 . 
 
 4. Four bearded gods, the Eenexiu, /www (]()>>' ' ' 
 
 A^/WVv I 1 —21 U I 
 
 i.e., " those "who give names." 
 
 5. Four females, each wearing the Crown of the 
 
 South ; these are the " Queens of the South," ?=> p^.
 
 294 
 
 ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 6. Four females, each wearinsr the Crown of the 
 North ; these are, presumably, the " Queens of the 
 
 North ; " these are the Khnemut, f) 
 
 ^ ^ 111 
 
 7. Four females, without crowns. 
 
 8. Four bearded gods, with their backs slightly 
 bowed ; these are the gods who praise Ea. 
 
 9. A cat-headed god called Mati, l] [ . 
 The text which refers to these cjods reads : — 
 
 I I I 
 
 rn AA/vw\ — M — 
 
 AAAAAA 
 
 (3 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 11 I I I 
 
 r^^ ^^ 
 
 /vvvvv\ '^, 
 
 I «-^ /wvvv\ 
 
 ^ 
 
 criD ^M> MID D I y^ 11 1 
 
 u 
 
 *^ ^ Li I /WV/^A «i!r^ I -£lj 1 I A/*/^AA I -ssll I I I 
 
 AA/WV\ 
 
 I I I 
 
 -5hv-i 
 
 
 
 I 2;;. _;^S^ AA/\A/v% — L-^^ 
 
 a 
 
 D D 
 
 1 D 
 
 o 
 
 I I 
 
 I s j\ 
 
 (^ 111 <^ ^ -^ 
 
 I D D 
 I 7i 
 
 (^ 
 
 
 i 
 
 i=r^ 1 1 I 
 
 M'ar., ^ 
 
 , Sar, Cliampollion, iMfoi!!/TOei)fs, torn, ii., p. 539.
 
 THE BEARERS OF RA S CROWNS 
 
 295 
 
 I I I 
 
 I AA/VV\A AA/VW\ AAAA/W 
 
 I AA/^^AA /NA/NAAA -— ^ 
 
 1^11 l^^^Q 
 
 J\\ 1 1^^ 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 I I I 
 
 ^ A III I I l^-w, 
 
 iJcmii 1 
 
 I D <5 — ^ 
 
 w 
 
 w 
 
 U /10 
 
 qo 
 
 
 ^ ^ D ^=: F=q ^M I I I I J\ III 
 
 7i III ^ 
 
 i I I /V.AAAA 
 
 ^ I — •<— 
 
 AAA/W\ 
 
 riD II I r 
 
 <^ — *- 
 
 n I n ^/VW^A M A 
 
 U I (2 ^ I I I I 
 
 I -WWNA I I ,VWW\ y ^-^ 
 
 I (2 ^ I I I I ^^^ J I 
 
 1 _w.']fm^=^m^i^=sf e ^ 
 
 I D ^ 
 
 1[ 
 
 D " 
 
 AAAAA^ 
 
 (2 111 
 
 D 
 
 ;^1 D 
 
 r ' * ^ I i AA/V^A^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^i:?^^> A/wv 
 
 AAA/W\ 
 ^ Jl I I I 
 
 I A/V>AA/\ 
 
 
 rAAA/V\ 
 
 I fv) 
 
 I ^-^ y ^WV\A AVW^A 
 
 I I X S I M 
 
 -H A^AAAA 
 
 1 CliampoUion, Monioaents, torn, ii., p. 539.
 
 296 ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 r-vm 
 
 ^ 11 mil lit (j 
 
 lllllllll 
 
 J] 
 
 imi MM' 
 
 llllimi // /vw^A^ <:zi:: 
 
 : k Jl 
 
 cr:zi 
 
 .]• 
 
 
 
 The Stablishers of the White Crown. 
 
 The Four Weepers, 
 
 Of the gods wearing the Wliite Crown it is said : — 
 
 " Those who are in this picture are they who stablisli 
 " the White Crown on the gods who follow Ea ; they 
 " themselves remain in the Tuat, but their souls go 
 " forward and stand at [tliis] gate." 
 
 Of the four Weepers it is said : — 
 
 "Tliose who are in this picture in this gate make
 
 THE BEARERS OF RA S CROWNS 
 
 297 
 
 " lamentation for Osiris after Ea hath made his appear- 
 " ance from Anient ; their souls go forward in his train, 
 " but they themselves follow after Osiris." 
 
 Of the four gods wearing the Eed Crown it is said : — 
 
 " Those who are in this picture are those who unite 
 
 " themselves to Ra, and they make his births to come 
 
 ^iSi 
 
 
 -^ AMWVV\ (5 ■ 
 
 <^ I :^"s -»"— 1'***^^ ..■■■■■ akk. .*==: "^^ — »— r"^" 
 
 •• • .♦•..*••♦.•••••..* ».«*•/.*.•.•**••♦ « • 
 
 The Stablishers of the Red Crown. 
 
 The god* who give names. 
 
 " to pass in the earth ; their souls go forward in his 
 " train, but their bodies remain in their places (or, 
 " seats)." 
 
 Of the four Eeneniu it is said : — 
 
 " [Those who are in this picture are they who give 
 " the name to Etl, and they magnify the names of all
 
 298 
 
 ELEVEXTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 " his forms ; their souls go forward in his following, 
 " but their bodies remain in their places (or, seats)."] ^ 
 
 Of the four goddesses wearing the White Crown it is 
 said : — 
 
 " Those who are in tliis picture are they who make 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 A^/VVW\ 
 
 AVVVV*V 
 
 i I 1 
 
 C\l' 
 
 A 
 
 /www\ 
 N*^f\ I «b 
 
 
 aamnNAI I i mikim t 1 1 
 
 
 • • , • • • i »•«••• • •• • , • ' « • • • *. ' « . • • • «; 
 
 Goddesses who stabli.sh the White and Red Crowus. 
 
 " Maat to advance, and who make it to be stablished 
 "in the shrine of Efi when Ea taketli up his position 
 " in Nut ; their souls pass onwards in his following, 
 " but their bodies remain in their places." 
 
 * Supplied from the tomb of Ramcses YI.
 
 THE GODS WHO PRAISE RA AT DAWN 2g9 
 
 Of tlie four goddesses wearing the Eed Crown it is 
 said : — 
 
 " Those who are in tliis picture are they who stablish 
 " time, and they make to come into being the years for 
 '■ those who keep ward over the condemned ones in the 
 " Tuat and over those w^ho have their life in heaven ; 
 " they follow in the train of this great god." 
 
 
 .^•—fj AW»vv\ I 
 
 
 I I 1 ~ • A*vvwi A\_* • '114 ^HM ■ I • 
 
 =Ir:^'''^^ - lA. ",,,1 ^ 
 /»r — > r_ ~-»~ ^^*^ .Jr I • • ^ ill ^^ 
 
 Goddesses who drive away Set. Gods who adore and praise Ra. Mati. 
 
 Of the four females who are without crowns it is 
 said : — 
 
 " Those who are in this picture in [this] gate make 
 "lamentation and tear their hair in the presence of 
 " this great god in Anientet ; they make Set to with- 
 " draw from this pylon, and they do not enter into the 
 " height of heaven."
 
 300 ELEVENTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 Of the four gods with their backs bowed it is said : — 
 " Those who are in this picture make adoration to 
 " Ea and sing praises unto him, and in their place in 
 " the Tuat they hymn those gods who are in the Tuat, 
 "and who keep guard over the Hidden Door. [They 
 " remain in their places."] ^ 
 
 ["The warder of the door of this Circle remaineth 
 " in his place."] ^ 
 
 ' Supplied from tlic tomb of Eamescs VI.
 
 ( 301 ) 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 THE GATE OF SEBI AND EERI. 
 
 The Twelfth Division of the Tuat. 
 
 HAViNCr passed through the Eleventh Division of the 
 Tuat, the boat of the sun arrives at the gateway 
 
 Teseut-baiu, ^^ ^ "^^ , which is the last that he 
 
 will have to pass through before emerging in heaven 
 in the light of a new day. "This great god conieth 
 " forth to this gate, this great god entereth through it, 
 " and the gods who are therein acclaim the great god." 
 The gateway is like that through which the god passed 
 into the previous Division ; at the entrance to the gate 
 proper stands a bearded mummied form called Pax, 
 
 A^ lluAj ^^*^ ^t its exit stands a similar form called 
 
 Akhekhi, QSh^^T^' ^^^^ corridor is swept by 
 flames of fire, which proceed from the mouths of uraei, 
 as before. In the space which is usually guarded by a 
 number of gods stand two staves, each of which is 
 surmounted by a bearded head;- on one head is the 
 
 disk of Tem, .^ , and on the other a beetle, the symbol 
 
 of Khepera. The text which refers to these reads :
 
 , . ^ .... ' . -'-...J/.l-. ' .'- i - ' 
 
 
 r-3 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 ir 
 
 AWWW 
 I I I 
 
 I ^f 
 
 I A 
 I i I 
 
 AAMWV 
 • I I 
 
 I • I 
 
 ■ t 
 
 L*1 
 
 Ltl 
 
 The Gate Tesert-Bni'.i. 
 
 The doors of Sebi and Reri.
 
 The Sun-god under the form of Khejiera with liis Disk, in his Boat 
 supported by Nu and received by Xut. '
 
 304 TWELFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 I rri I 1 1 1 1 I M iT^ \ y ^\\\^<^y^ J 
 
 ^ M^mn© Jj^ "They stand up on their heads, 
 
 " and they come into being on their staves by the 
 " gate ; the heads stand up by the gate." 
 
 The monster serpent which stands on its tail and 
 
 guards the one door is called Sebi, :^ ij , and the two 
 
 lines of text which refer to his admission of Ra read, 
 " He who is over this door openeth to Ra. Sa saith 
 " unto Sebi, ' Open thy gate to Ra, unfold thy portal to 
 " Khuti, so that he may come fortli from the hidden 
 "place, and may take up his position in the body of 
 " Nut.' Behold, there is wailing among the souls 
 " who dwell in Anient after this door hath closed," 
 
 O I imiiiir /wvw. '^ W iJl J^ -M^\. I ii[Z3l' 
 
 The monster serpent which stands on its tail and 
 
 guards the other door is called Reki, [I n , and the 
 
 two lines of text which refer to his admission of Ra 
 read, " He who is over this door openeth to Ra. Sa 
 " saith unto Rem, ' Open thy gate to Ra, unfold thy 
 " portal to Khuti, so that he may come forth from the 
 "hidden place, and may take up his position in the 
 "body of Nut.' Behold, there is wailing among the 
 '• souls who dwell in Anient after this door hath closed."
 
 THK BIRTH OF THE SUN-GOD 305 
 
 The text, being similar to that which refers to Sebi, is 
 not repeated here. 
 
 On each side of the door is a uraeiis, the one repre- 
 senting Isis and the other Nephthys, and of them it is 
 said, " They it is who guard this hidden gate of Ament, 
 " and they pass onwards in the following of this god," 
 
 AA^^^ ^H— —*^ ^ ,;__0 PI l-TJ— I n '""'^ ^ ^ 
 
 c^ I I I j^ _^ nrzj Ayvwv. I s 1 AAAA^ r^-^^ j^ 
 
 yVNAAAA 
 
 I I 1^ II 
 
 q I D 
 
 Here we see tliat the end of tlie Tuat is reached, 
 and the boat of the sun has reached that portion of it 
 through which he is about to emerge in the waters of 
 Nu, and thence in the form of a disk in the sky of 
 this world. Having passed on to the water the boat 
 is supported by the two arms of Xu himself, or, as 
 the text says, " These two arms come forth from the 
 
 " waters, and they bear up this god," <rr> II w 
 /wwvA s=z3 ^'wwv I u ^ jYie god appears in the 
 
 /w^/^A^ — M — I I I I A^AAA^ 
 
 boat in the form of a beetle, which is rolling along a 
 disk ; on the left of the beetle is Isis, and on the right 
 Nephthys. The three beings in the front of the boat 
 
 are probably the personifications of doors, imiinr , and 
 
 " IIIIIIMI 
 
 the gods to the left are See, "^^ 1 L Shu, [3, Hek, 
 § -cz:^, Hu, X %, and Sa, ^12. In the hiero- 
 glyphics at the top of the open space aljove the boat is 
 
 VOL. H. X
 
 306 TWELFTH DIVISION OF THE TUAT 
 
 written, "This. god taketli up his place in the Matetet 
 " Boat [with] the gods who are m it, r-^-i ^. 
 
 "^ s^n " ~ V ' ''^^'^^ * ^^^'^7 i^^ t^^6 waters 
 above, or beyond the boat, is a kind of island, formed 
 by the body of a god, which is bent round in such a 
 way that the tips of his toes touch the back of his 
 head. On his head stands the goddess Nut, with her 
 arms and hands raised and stretched out to receive the 
 disk of the sun, which the Beetle is rolling towards her ; 
 
 the text says, " Nut receiveth Ea," ^ Q ^ ^ 1 ® . 
 The island formed by the body of the god is said to be 
 " Osiris, whose circuit is the Tuat," -^'^^^ D v ^ 
 
 END OF VOL. II.
 
 LONDON 
 
 PRIKTED BT GILBBUT AKD RrVINGTON LIMITED 
 
 ST. JOHlr's HOUSE, CLEBKSKWELL, E.C,
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, LOS ANGELES 
 THE UNIVERSITY LIBRARY 
 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped belo-^ 
 
 University of California 
 
 SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 405 Hllgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 
 
 Return this material to the library 
 
 from which it was borrowed. 
 
 1 
 
 THE LIBRARY 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFCWRNIfl 
 
 UyS ANGELES
 
 (k 
 
 3 1158 00764 8354 
 
 1 
 
 UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 A A 000 136 895 o